CA1053374A - Justifying, text writing composing and reproducing machine - Google Patents

Abstract

ABSTRACT OF THE DISCLOSURE

A desk top justifying typographic apparatus including a dividing and encoding means for encoding text information and line terminating information, and wherein the line terminating information includes a signal which is transmitted through a word space counter and a number of units left in a line measuring means for controlling a justifying encoding means to instantly and simultaneously calculate and encode a justifying quotient and remainder code appropriate for the terminated line, and wherein the encoded text and justifying information controls a printing means to automatically produce a justified text.

Description

~1 10533'7~ 1 JUSTIFYING TEX~ WRITING CO~POSI~G
AND R~P~ODUCING ~C~I~ES
_ The justifying text writing system disclosed herein .
in-ludes two ~achines: a co~posing an~ a reproducing machine.
The composing machine is a desk top just.ifying text wri~ir.g m~chin~ including automatic encodiny and reading control .
means for operating a desk top justifyin~ repro~ucing machina, or for operating larger an~ more sop~isticated printing machines capable of auto~atic justification. The machine will pro~uce unjustified typad lines an~ will auto;natically encode for controlling another machine to print justified lines, as a r~sult of a single series of manual keyboard com~osing operations an,~
automatic code controlled reproducing operations for producing :
a justified copy of a literal text, respectively, !~
The composing machine includes a ~elete key an~ au~o- ~\~
matic deleting and back spacing m~ans that reverses the cpmposer ~and deletes co~es from a~code medium according to previously ::~
encoded information for back space correction purposes. The composing machine operates much like a normal offic~ typewriter and may be operated by a psrson with a little more than norm~l type-~riting skills for encoding a justified corrected text and function control code~, The operator need not be concerned with the s width of characters or spaces in order to back 37~

space and delete, since the deleting and back spacing is performed accurately, an~ automatically upon depression of the single delete key. Coordinated back spacing of ~he literal text operations, reversing of functions and automatic deleting of the individual respective codes is performed automatically in accordance with the codes previously encoded and then being deleted on the code medium. Thus, khere can be no error between the forward and delete operations.
The composer includes automatic justifying computing and encoding means, and the justifying codes are recorded ahead of the text codes for a line, so reading for reproduction purposes proceeds smoothly in one direction. The dividing and justifying encoding means is automatically operable under control of a word space counter and an amount left in a line measuring means upon return of the composing machine carriage.
This dividing and encoding means automatically divides the :
amount left in a line by the counted word spaces in the line, and immediately encodes the justifying information, without first realizing a digitally expressed answer and without any operator intervention.
In the Applicants' arrangement, a text line composing set of operations automatically establishes both the divisor number of word spaces and, after the line extends into the justifying area, the dividend number of units left in the line is automatically established. ~nytime after the line extends into the justifying area and upon a carriage return operation, the novel dividing and encoding arrangement is simultaneously operated according to the two important justification fac-tors, namely ~he pre-established divisor number of word spaces and the pre-establi~hed dividend number of units left in the line, and the arrangement instantly .~ ~

-~L~5337~

provides both an encoded quotient number of units and an encoded remainder number of units for justified copy reproduction.
The above differs considerably from the prior art techniques that, in one form or other, count the divisor number of word spaces and the entire composed unit extent of the line (the uni-t extent of theline is not a factor in a jus~ifying dividing operation), during composition of the line. Then, when ~he line is terminated in a variable justifying zone that ~aries in extent according to the number o word spaces, the accumulated extent of the line must first be s~btracted from the number of units for the justified line, in order to determine the number of dividend factor units that are left in the line. Thus, in the prior art, there must be a subtraction operation before the justi~ication division opera~ions can begin.
In Applicants' arrangement, upon carriage return, the justi-fication division operation takes place immediately according to established factors. Also, the operation oE Applicants' novel dividing arrangement consists of a divisor switching means that advances only one increment (regardless of the number it represents) simultaneously with a one increment movement of the dividend switching means (regardless of the number it represents) to thereupon immediately provide an encoded quotient and simultaneously encoded remaind~r. No prior art reference shows justification information provided with so few operations, and thus Applicants' invention provides a substantial contribution to the art.
The composing machine is capable of encoding for justification of any line that has at least one word space and that extends into a generous justifyiny area which precedes the right hand margin.
Thus, the arrangement can accommodate the encoding requirements of very narrow columns, as used in newspapers for example, and even in such A

;~ 10 5 J-17 narrow columns the justified copy will present a proper a~pearance as long as the line is filled out in accordanse with normal good typing practices. The code medium is co~pletely auto~atically ser~ed and fed through all of the encoling and reading means, including reading for justified reproduction purposes, and thus all customary manual handling of t~e code medium is eliminated. Furthermore, the composer auto~atic~lly shifts the co~e medium during all back space and deleting functions. The justified line is produced one line behind the unjustified copy; in other words, the justified copy line is produced automatically while a succeeding unjustified copy line is being typed.
A differential character and space ~ey lock means prevents operation of ch~racter and space keys that would extend a line beyond the right hand margin, and this means is ~ppropriately ef~ective to permit the addition of any character or space that will still fit in the line at any given time and the arrangement also accounts for the difference in character sizes for eacn key in upper and lower case conditions.
Since a "space" at the end of a juætified line would destroy the effect of justifying, the co~poser also includes m~ans for preventing conclusion of a justi~iable line when a word space or a nut space is the la~t ncoded information in that line. The line en~o~ing operations are automatically oncludel ard the ~ustifying information encoded upon return _3_ 1/~533~4 of the composing machine carriage. Therefore, means are pro-vided ~or preventing inadvertent return of the composing machine carriage, when a "spac~" is the last thing encoded and tho line has boen extended into the justifying area at the end of the line. When the carriage is locked by this means, it may be unlocked for return of the carriage by deletion of tho "space"
or by addition of one or more characters.
Adjustable left and right hand margin means are provided ~or lo-ating ~e posit ion and width of a column, and the right hand margin means is affected ~y approach o the carriage near the ~ d of a line for measuring the amount left in that line for justifying purposes, for differential end o~ line key l~cking purp~ses, for rendering effecti~e the means for preventing a "space" at the end of a justifiable line, and for ¢ontrolling an ~udio-visual justifying area signal means that indicates the final progress of a line to the operator.
The composer inclu~es a color coded ~ustifying area sign~l means that indicates entry of a line into the justifyin~
araa and thereaf.er it indicate~ the numb9r af units left in that line, appropriately indicates the keys that may be locked by the differential key lock~, and finally may indicate that the line is perfectly filled out, as the case may be.
A text and general function enco~ing means, a back space and deleting reading ~evice, justifying enCo~ling means 10533'~4 and a main reading device for controlling reproducing operations, arranged in that order in respect to the flow of code media therethrough, together with slack code madia sensing means and aut~matic media han~ling means, are asse~led into a single unit for p~rformance of automatic encoding, auto~atic deletin~, and automatic justifyin~ reproducing operations without any manual handling of the code media~
A key initiated 'clearing' arrangement is provided for restoring the c~mposing machine to nor~al set-up conditions and for enco~ing a clear code, at the same time, for automatically controlling the reproducing machine to assume the same normal set up conditions. A key initiated 'conditioning' arrangem2nt ..
is pro~i~ed for enco~ing the instant set-up co~ditions of the co~posing machine on the code medium, and this c~de will control the repro~ucsr to assume these same conditions when the code is read during reproducing operations. These keys may be operatea at any time during encoding operations. However, their functions are most significant when a piece of work is~begun, to assure proper coordination betwePn ths composing and reproducing machines, particularly immediately after a new supply of code madi~ is inserted in the machine. A manually presettable key is also provided ~or determining that the "clearing arrangement" or the "conditioning arrangement" will operate automatically for encoding the clear code or a cond.itioning code following carriage 105337~ ~

return or a line delete o~eration for examples. Thus, it is unnecessary to make condition set-up notations manually on any code media that may be separated from prec~oding co~e media and stored away for future reuse, since a clear co~e or a con~ition code will precede the text codes for eac~ line.
Forward and reverse extra line space keys are provided for correspondingly rotating the platen one line space upon each operation of the respective key in the co~posing machine an~ for encoding for the same extra line spacing in the reproducing machine. These extra line spaces are dif~erantiated from th~
normal lin_ spacing that occurs upon return of the carriage, Upon automatic de1etion of an extra lina space code, the platen in the composing machine is rotated one line space in the opposite direction to tho code then ~eleted, to thus po~ition the line as it w~ before that particular line space was encoded.
The operator normally merely puts pap_r in the reprodu~ing machine, sets a left margin control ~nd shifts a key that conditions the machine for co~e controlled operations.
The arrangement of the enco~ed information for each line i~ such that the reproducer is normally automatically operated according to a justi~ying ~uotient code, a justifying remainder code, a machine conditioning or clearing code, the text co~es (in_lud-ing characters, spaces and functions) and a carriage return code, in that order, so that the controlling information for ~oS337'~

succeeding lines is fed in a single forward direction and the operator need not handle the code media or perform any of the reproducing operations.
The reproducing machine includes means, responsive to conditioning codes, for in each instance operating the machine to assume a particular group of operating conditions that correspond to the operating conditions of the composing machine at the time the conditioning code was encoded. The reproducing machine also includes clearing means, responsive to a clear code, for placing the machine in a normal operating group of conditions.
In a reader control "stop" condition, the reproducer may be operated manually, for inserting variables in an otherwise code controlled reproduction, or for using the machine as a typewriter.
The invention is direction to a ~ypographic apparatus wherein code~ corresponding to text characters and word spaces are employed to control the operation of the apparatus.
In a typographic apparatus, a justifying aividing and encoding means comprising an amount left in a line measuring means operable in the latter portion of composition of a line for determining the amount left in a line prior to terminatin~ of the line, a space counter for counting the number of adjustable spaces in a line prior to termination of the line, and a line terminating means for operating said justifying dividing and encoding means to, in one instant, encode the justifying quotient and remainder under control of said measuring means and said space counter as adjusted by composition of the line.
FIGURE DESCRIPTIONS
The Figures designated by unprimed numerals illustrate parts of the composer, while the Figures designated by primed numerals illustrate the reproducer.
Figure 1 is a reduced full left side ele~ation of the composer, with the cover ~ragmented to expose the mechanism immediately therebehind.

1053;3';'4 Figure 2 is a reduced top plan view of the composer, with the cover and mechanisms omitted to show the details of the basic framework.
Figure 3 is a fragmentary top view of the composing machine, showing primarily a portion of th'e paper carriage and the keys on the keyboard.
Figure 4 i5 a fragmentary right sectional view of the machine taken on line 4-4 of Figure 2, showing pri~arily the internal parts and modifications of the standard typewriter, and electrical contacts under the character keys, but omitting so~e of the parts shown in Figurè 5 for clarity.
Figure 5 is a fragmentary view showing parts omitted from Figure 4. ' Figure 6 is a fragmentary right side'view showing greater details of upper and lower'case mechanisms shown in part in Figure 4, Figure 7 is a fragmentary right rear quarter perspective view of some of the parts shown in Figure 6, 105337~ ~
Figure 8 is a fragmentary right side view of the standard typewriter s'nowing primarily the carriage and its mountings.
Fiyure 9 is a rront view of the main carriage moving spring means and showing its mounting on a fragment of the standard typewriter frame and including a piece of the carriage.
Figure 10 is a fragmentary right sectional view of some of the mechanism shown in Figure 19, taken generally on line 10 - 10 (Fig. 19), showing primarily a por~ion of the carriaye moving mechanism, Figure 11 is a schematic wiring diagram, showing primarily the circuitry for a normal character key under various circumstances.
Figure 12 is a fragmentary conden~ed top view of the typewriter keyboard and the di~ferential key lock mechanism.
Figure 13 is a fragmentary right side vieW of part of the under line key and its coding switch.
Figure 14 is a fragmentary left side elevational view of the tape return key, taken generally on line 14-14, Figure 3.

533'~
~ igure 15 is a fragmentar~ sectional left side elevational view, taken generally on line 15-15, Figure 3, showing primarily the delete key.
Figure 15 is a fragmentary view illustrat-ing the operated positions of some of the parts shown in ~igure 15.
Figure 17 is a front sectional eleva-tional view of the justifying on-off key mechanism taken generall~ on line 17-17, Fig. 18.
Figure 18 is a fragmentary right sectional elevation of the machine taken generally on line 18-18, FigO 2, and showing primarily the amount left in line mechanistn and portions of the standard typewriter in the background.
Figure 19 is a reduced fragmentary sectional front view of the typewriter, taken generally on line 19 - 19 (Fig. 3), with the carriage, type mechanism and other relatively common mechanism omitted for clarity, showing primarily some of the detalls of the typewri~er support frame members, the ribbon fee~ mechanism and part of the carriage moving mechanism, including a fragment of the carriage born movement control rack.
Figure 20 is a fragmentary right sectional elevation of part of the carriage moving mechanism as seen from line 20 - 2~ (Fig. 24) with some parts omitted ~or clarity.

1 1~533~4 Figure 21 is a fragmentary right side elevational view of mechanism 5hown in Figure 23, wi,h some parts omitted for clarity.
Figure 22 is a right sectional elevation of the carriage moving mechanism as viewed from line 22 - 22 ~Fig. 23).
Figure 23 is a ragmentary front sectional elevation taken on line 23 - 23 (Fig. 10) and show-ing a major part of the carriage moving mechanism.
Figure 24 is a front view of some of the mechanism shown less clearly in Figure 23.
Figure 25 is a front view of some of the mechanism included obscurely in Figure 23~
Figure 2~ is a front view of some of the mechanism shown obscurely in Figure 23.
Figure 27 is $ragmentary exploded isometric view of some of the parts shown obscurely in Figure 23.
Figure 2~ is a fragmentary sectional rear view, taken on line 28-28 (Fig.31), showing primarily upper-lower case switch means for con-trolling diferential carriage movement.
Figure 29 is a view like Figure 28, but showing a "bold" and ~regular~ switch means ~ 1 1ci533~4 Figure 30 is a view like Figure 28, but showing a "pxint" and "no print" switch means, ~ igure 31 is a full left side elevation of a snap switch assembly supported principally on vertical plates 416 and 417 (Fig~2) Figure 32 is a front view of case shift-ing switch mechanism shown obs~urely in Figure 23.
Figure 33 is a fragmentary sectional rear view, taken on line 33-33 (Fig. 31), of some of the mechanism in Figure 31.
Figure 34 is a rear elevational view of case shifting snap switch mechanism as viewed from the left (line 34-34) in Figure 31.
Figure 35 is a .schematic wiring diagram of the case -~ shift circuitry.
Figure 36 is an oblique sectional view taken as seen from the top and front of the machine, generally on line 36-36 (Figr 37), showing the tape handling assembly (punches, readers, etc.~
with its hinged cover and general machine covering removed for clarity.
Figure 37 is a left sectional elevation o the tape han~ling assembly, as viewed generally from line 37-37 (Fig. 36), but including the assembly's cover as viewed from line 38-38 tFig. 39)-533'7~
Figure 38 is an enlarged scalefragmentary left sectional view, taken generally on line 37-37 (Fig. 36) and on line 38-38 (Fig. 39), showing more clearly some of the mechanism in Figure 37.
Figure 39 is a fragmentary obli~ue plane view of the tape handling assembly showing primarily the assembly's hinged cover.
Figure 40 is a fragmentaxy left sectional view, taken on line 40-40 tFig. 39), showing some of the details of the tape handling assembly.
Figure 41 is a sectional view of some of the tape feeding sprockets and detents therefor, taken on line 41 - 41 ~Fig. 39).
Figure 42 is a fragmentary right sectional view of the punch control key, in "on" position, as seen general]y from line 42-42 (Fig. 44).
Figure 43 is similar to Figure 42, but it shows the key in "off" positionO
Figure 44 is a fragmentary front view of the function control keys, located on the right side of ~he keyboard as viewed generally from line 44-44 (Fig.3) Figure 45 is a fragmented full right side elevation of the machine with the cover and various parts cut away to show greater detail.
Figure 46 is a fragmentary condensed ~ull scale front view of ~he punch control relay 603 included in reduced scale Figure 45.

~ ~5~3'~4 Figure 47 is a fragmented full scale righ~ side view of the relay shown in Figure 46.
Figure 4~ is a schematic wiring diagram, showing primarily the punch control key arrangement in ~loff'' position.
Figure 49 is a full scale fragmented left side view of some of the mechanism shown in reduced scale in Figure 1.
Figure 50 is a full right side view of the forward and reverse tape cycling assembly 572, a left side view of which is included in Figure 49.
Figure 51 is a sectional front view of the,assembly shown in Figure 50, taken on line 51-51 (Figs. 49 and 50), Figure 52 is a sectional front view of the forwar~ tape cycling mechanism, also shown in Figure 51, but with some of the parts of this asse~bly omitted for clarity.
Figure 53 is a front view of some of the forwa.rd tape cycling mechanism shown in Figure 51 and omitted from Figure 52.
Figure 54 is a schematic wiring diagram of the ,forward main-punch tape feeding circui.t.

10533 7~L ~
Figure 55 is a fragmentary sectional elevation of the punch assembly~ taken on line 55-55 (Fig.36).
¦ Figure 56 is a reduced scale full right ¦ side elevational view of the machine.
Figure 5i is a condensed fragmentary front view, taken generally on line 57-57 (Fig. 3), showing primarily the space keys.
Figure 58 is a fragmentary right side view of the space keys, and including some of the space key locks and some of the mechanism shown in Figure 4.
Figure 59 is a schematic wiring diagram showing the space key circuits.
Figure 60 is a fragmentary view show m g the space key relays and their mounting, with a protective cover 819 (Fig.45) cut away to show the relays thereunder.
Figure 61 is a fragmented ront sec~ional elevation of the word space counter, taken on or about line 61-61 (Fig. 18), showing primarily means for counting 17 to 160 word spaces.
Figure 62 is a schematic wiring diagram, showing particularities of the circuit for the word space bar and for word space counting.

~ ~0533'~4 Figure 63 is a front sectional elevation of a word space counter, taken generally on line 63 63 (Fig. 18), showing primarily a front view of a brush carrier member and forward counting switch.
Figure 64 is a front sectional elevation of the word space counter, taken generally on line 64 - 64 (Fig. 18), showing primarily electrical .
con~acts with which the brushes in Figure 63 cooperate, Figure 65 is a ~ront sectional elevation o~ the word space counter, taken generally on line 65-65 (~ig. 18), showing primarily means ~or counting 1 to 16 word spaces.
Figure 66 is a schematic wiring diagram, .
showing primarily delete key and tape return key circuits, and other automatically initiated circuits involved with back spacing, deleting and reverse tape handling operations~
Figure 67 is a left sectional elevation of part of the tape handling assembly, taken generally on l~ine 67-67 (Fig. 36~, and showing primarily slack tape controlled witch means, reverse tape feeding means and the delete switch .
:

10533 ;'~
Figure 68 is a fragmentary left side view, showing primarily a modification of ~he backspace release key 1037 shown in Figure 15.
Figure 69 is a fragmentary sectional left side elevational view, taken generally on line 15-15, Figure 3, showing another modification of the back space release key 1037.
Figure 70 is a schematic diagram of ~he back space decoder.
Figure 71 is a detailed top view of the .
back space decoder with some of the parts fragmented for clarity.
Figure 72 is a fragmentary left side view of the mechanism shown in Figure 71, showing primarily the mounting and support brackets for the back space decoder.
Figure 73 is a ~ront sectional view of .
the back space decoder taken on line 73~73 ~ . 71~.
Figure 74 is-a condensed fragmentary view of part of the mechanism sh~wn in Figure 71 with some of the decoder switch means sectioned on line 74-74 (Fig. 75).
Figure 75 is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoder switch means taken for example on line 75-75 (~ig~ 74), . -533~
~ igure 75 is a fragmentary front view showi~ great~r detail of some of .he mechanism shown also in Figure 23.
Figure 77 is a fragmentary front view of some of the mechanism found also in Figure 23, but the mechanism shown here is in operated position.
Figure 78 is a front sectional view of the reverse tape cycling mechanism, as seen from line 78~78 ~Fig. 50) and as also shown in the background of Figure 51. .
Figure 79 is a fragment of the carriage escapement mechanism shown in Figure 23, showing primarily the main deten~ means and carriage return switch means with greater clarity.
Figure 80 is a schematic wiring diagram showing primarily tape return circuits and other normalizing circuits that are employed following deleting operations.
Figure 81 is a schematlc wiring diagram showing primarily some of the circuitry for prevent-ing the occurrence of a word space, a nut space or an underline mark at the end of a justifiable line, Figure 82 is a schematic wiring diagram showing some of the circuitry involved with the Clear Key and the Conditioning Key~

`~ ~ 10533~
Figure 83 i5 a schematic wiring diagram of the preliminary carriage return circuits, including the carriage return encoding arrangement.
Figure 84 is a right side fragmentary view of the keyboard ball-lock interposer mechanism, as seen from line 84-8~, Figure 44.
Figure 85 is a fragmentary top view of the mechanism shown in Figure 84 with the cover removed.
Figure 86 is a fragmentary front view of a cycling control assembly 1362, shown also in Figures 1 and 49, with minor parts removed for clarity.
Fi~ure 87 is a right side el~vation of the assembly 1362 shown in Figure 49.
Figure 88 is a right sectional view of the end of line cvcling control, as viewed from line 88-88, Fig. 86. -Figure 89 is a top view of the switchesshown in Figure 88.
Figure 90 is a sectional elevation of circuit breaker 1341, as viewed from l m e 90-90, ~igure 86.
Figure 91 is a section view of the end of line tape ~eed mechanism as viewed from Line 91-91, Fig. 86.

10533'7~L I
Figure 92 is a schematic wir'~ng diagram showing primarily the justifying dividing and encoding circuits.
Figure 93 is a sectional elevation of the clearing sequence control as viewed from line 93-93, Figure 86.
Figure 94 is a sectional elevation of the no-punch backspacing sequence control 3244 as viewed from line 94-94, Figure 86.
Figure 95 is a fragmentary top view of the left margin control means shown also in Figure 96.
Figure 96 is a fragmentary front view of the mechanism shown in Figure 95.
Figure 97 is a left side view of the mechanism shown in Figure 96.
Figure 98 is a fragmentary right side view of some of the mechanism shown in Figur~ 95 and 96, and additionally showing the full carriage return switch.
Figure 9g is a fragmentary left sectional elevation of the right margin control means taken on line 99-99, Figure 101.
Figure 100 i5 a fragmentary top view of the right margin control m~a~s shown also in Figures 99 and 101, with certain parts removed for clarity.

~ 1053~3'Y~ I
Figure 101 is a fragmentary ront elevation of the right margin control means shown in Figure 100.
Figure 10~ is a fragmentary top view of some of the mechanism shown in Figure 101.
~ igure 103 is a fragmentary top view of some of th~ mechanism shown in Figure 101.
Fig~re 104 i5 a fragmentary sectional view showing only the physical connection between the right margin means and the amount left in the line measuring mechanism, as seen from line 17-17 (Fig. 18).
Figure 105 is a sectional view, with parts removed for clarity, taken on line 105-105 (Fig. : .
18) and showing primarily the motivating and .
detent means for the amount left in line measuring : means.
Figura 106 is a section ViQW of the amount left in line mechanism, shown ~rom line 106-106 (Fig. 18), with parts removed for clarit~.
Fi~ure 107 may be described the same as Figure 106 above, but it is taken on line 107-107 (Fig. 18~.

~1 1053374 Figure 108 is a view of a commutator structure in the end of line mechanism, taken O1l line 108-108 (Fig. 18).
Figure 109 i5 a frasmentary view of a commutator structure in the end of line mechanism, taken on line 109-109, Fig. 18).
Figure 110 is a view of a commutator structure in the end of line mechanism, taken on line 110-110 (Fig. 18).
- Figure 111 is a ragmentary front elevational view of the differential key lock mechanism.
Figure 112 is a fragmentary right sectional view, taken on line 112-112, Figs. 111 and 113, showing primarily key lock indexing means for the differential key locks and including fragments of charactex keys and the main typewriter.
Figure 113 is a top view of the meahanism shown in Figure 111 and including fragments of the base frame of the machine to which the mechanism is secured.
Figure 114 is a full right side view of the diferential key lock mechanism and including fragments of character keys in positions relative tot~en~Lco.

- 2~ -1(~53374 Figure 115 is a sectional right elevation of a detent means for the differential key locks, as viewed from line 115-115 r Figs. 111 and 113.
Figure 116 is a sectional right side elevational view, taken generally on line 116-116, Figs. 111 and 113, showing primarily an over-rota-tion preventing ratchet means for the indexing means shown in Figuxe 112, and showing upper and lower case controls for t~e key lock mechanism.
Figure 117 is a xeduced fragmentary front view of approximately the left half of the general key lock mechanism as viewed from in front of the machine with the cover and othex parts cut away for clarity~ ;
Figure 118 is a reduced fragmentary front view of approximately the right half oE the general key lock mechanism as viewed from in front o the machine with the cover and other parts cut away for clarity.
Figure 119 is a schematic wir~ng diagram of the dlfferential key lock control circuitry.
Figure 120 is a condensed fragmentary sectional front view, taken substantially on line 120-120 ~Figs. 124 and 125~, with parts omitted for clarity and showing pa~ticularly the details of the dividing plate assemblies and their selecting ~eans.

2~

10533~4 Figure 121 is a fragmentary sectional view of the dividing plate assembly centralizers line shown in Figure 120 as seen from/121-121 therein.
Figure 122 is a condensed fragmentary sectional front elevation of the flividing and encoding mechanism as viewed from line 122 122 (Fig. 123) with parts removed for clarity.
Figure 123 is a fragmenta~y left sectional view of the dividing and encoding mechanism, with parts removed, taken substantially on line 123-123 (Fig. 122).
Figure 124 is a full right sectional ele-vation of the diviaing and encoding mechani~m as viewed from line 124-1~4 ~Fig. 122).
Figure 125 is a full left fragmentary sectional view of the dividing and enc~ding mechanism ~as seen from the left~of Figure 120, and with the di~iding plates removed ~or clarity.
~ igure 126 is a condensed fragmentary view of main motivating mechanism for the dividing and encoding mechanism and showing greater details o~ ~his mechanism which is also included in Figure 125.
Figure 127 is a reduced scale view of one of the dividing and encoding plate assemblies with a foreground frame plate removed and including sectioned members that cooperate with the assembly.

10533~4 Figuresl28-135 are schematic representa- ¦
tions, each indicating a dividing and encoding plate assemhly and the plates included therein.
Figure 136 is a schematic representation of an upper and a lower dividing and encoding plate assembly, and including representations of their selecting and motivating means, and including unit slide means representations that cooperate with the plates in the assemblies.
Figure 137 is a full size left side elevation of the iustifying punch tape feed control switch means 1486, included in reduced scale in Figure 1 and likewise indicated in Figure 2.
Figure 138 is a sectional elevation of the switch mea~s shown in Figure 137 as viewe~ from line 138~13~ therein.
Figure 139 is a view of a frame plate and mechanism as viewed from the left of Figure 137.
Figure 140 is a schematic ~iring diagram showing primarily restoring circuits that are effective after deleting and after carriage return operations.
Figure 141 is a fragmentary left side elevation of the line delete key as viewed generally from the left side of the keyboard (Fig. 3) with ¦ arts cu awa. ~or clarity.

~.~533~
Figure 142 is a fragmentary left side view showing greater detail of some of the parts also shown in Figure 141.
Figure 143 is a schematic drawing of the main code reader, the reproducing machine and the wiring for coordinating the operations thereof.
Figure 144 is a fragmented top view of the space at end o line preventing mechanism 2306 (Fig. 45~ showing all o the mechanism of this assembly with the top frame plate of the assembly removed for clar .L ty.
Figure 145 is a fragmentary sectiohal view of the main shaft of the mechanism shown in Figure 144.
Figuxe 146 is a fragmentary right sectional view taken generally on line 146-146 (Fig. 144) with some parts removed for clarity.
Figure 147 is a fragmentary sectional view of ~he pinwheel assembly 2318 (Figs. 144 and 146) as seen generally from line 147-147 tFig. 148).
Figure 148 is a fragmentary seetional view of the mechanism shown in Figure 147 as viewed from line 148-148 therein).

-~` l ~5337 Figure 149 is a fragmentary view, showing more clearly one of the parts included in Figure 148.
Figure 150 is a fragmentary sectional view of the pinwheel shown in Figure 147 as viewed from line 150~150 therein.
Figure 151 is a sectional view taken on line 151-151 (Fig. 147).
Figure 152 is a fragmentary sectional view taken generally on line 152-152 (Fig. 144).
Figure 153 is a schematic wiring diagram showing primarily the circuitry for at times operatlng the motivation solenoids shown in Figure 152.
Figure 154 is a fragmented sectional view of the bold and regular function control key as seen ro~ line 159-154 (Figs. 3 and 44)O
Figure 155 is a sectional view of the print and no print function control key as seen from line 155-}55 (Figs. 3 and 44).
Figure 156 is a fragmented view of some of the mechanism ln Figure 155 showing the key in an operated position.

. .

Figure 157 is a schematic wiring diagram showins circuitry that is involved with the bold and regular function control key.
Figur~ 158 is a sche~atic wiring diagram showing circuitry that is invQlved with the print and no print function control ~ey.
Figure 159 is a fragmentary right sectional view of the Clear Key as viewed from line 159-159 ~Fig. 44 ) .
Figure 160 is a sectional right side view o the Condition Key as viewed from line 160 - 160 (Fig. 44?-Figure 161 is a schematic wiring diagramshowing some of the motivating and controlllng circuitry involved wi~h the Clear Key.
Figure 162 is a schematic wiring diagram showing some o~ the circuitry for the Clear Key and the circuitry for the Condition Key.
Figure 163 is a top view of the Condition Encod~ng mechanism 2757 located as indicated in ~igure 2.
Figure 164 is a sectional front view o~
the Condition Encoding mechanism as viewed from line 164-164, Flg. L63.

. :

Figure 165 is a rear sectional view of the Conditi~on Encoding mechanism taken on line 165-165, Fig. 163.
Figure 166 is a right sectional view of the keyboard as seen ~rom line 166-166 (Fig. 44) and showing particularly the "Clear-Set" Key.
Figure 167 is a generally schematic wiring diagram of the stop printer circuits, but it also includes a fragmentary detailed sectional right side view of the stop printer key taken generally on a line 167-167 (Fig. 44).
Figure 168 is a fragmentary sectional top view of the stop printer circuit control mechanism a9 seen from llne 168-168 (Fig. 169).
Figure 169 is a detailed ~ront elevation of the mechanism ~hown in Figure 168.-Figure 170 is a fragmentary verticalsectio~al view of the left end of the paper carriage platen, showing primarily the fractional line spacing clutch and the manual platen control knob.
Figure 171 is a fragmentary left side view of some of the mechanisms shown in Fisure 1, showing primarily greater detail of the automatic line spacing mechanism.

~Q533~
Figure 172 is a sec~ional generally rear view of the line spacing mechanism, as viewed from the left of Figure 171 and from line 172-172 ~herein, with a few parts omitted for clarity.
Figure 173 is a fragmentary sectional view of mechanism shown in Figure 172 as seen from line 173-173 therein.
Figure 174 is a schematic wiring diagram OL the extra forward and reverse line spacing circuits.
Figure 175 is a fragmentary right sectional ~iew of the tape feed key 3075 taken on line 175-175 (Fig. 44).
Figure 176 is a fragmentary right sectional view of the 12 step tape feed key 3076 taken on line 176-176 (Fig. 44~.
Figure 177 is a schematic wiring diagram showing part of the consecutive tape feed circuitry~
Figure 178 is a schema~ic wiring diagram showing part of the 12 step tape feed circuitry.
Figure 179 is a schematic wiring diagram showing modified tape feed circuitry.
Figure 180 is a ra~mentary view of some of the general key-lock mechanism.

.. :.

Figure 181 is a sectional elevation o the punches-on circuit breaker as viewed from line 181-181, Figure 86.
Figure lB2 is a fragmentaxy plane view of a key lock, for locking several of the function keys that are located at ths right of the keyboard (Fig. 3), as seen rom above the keyboard with the cover and other part~ cut away ~or clarity.
Figure 183 is a fragm~ntary front view of the type arm segment and other related parts including a print pre~enting means.
Figure 184 is a fragmentary right sectional view taken generally on line 184-184 (Fig. 183).
Figure 185 is a full sized fragmentary left side view of some of the mechanism shown in reduced scale in Figure 1, showing primarily greater detail of the print preventing means.
Figure 186 is a fragmerltary sectional view, taken on line 106-106 (Figs. 18 and 187), showing some of the structures shown in Figure~ 106 and 109 and including further structure of an end of line signal switch means.

3.~

`~ ~Qs;~3~

Figure 187 is a fragmentary view of part of the mechanism shown in Figure 18 and including a right side view of further mechanism shown in Figure 186.
Figu~e 188 is a schematic wiring diagram of the end Of line signal means.

' ' -',.'.':; ~' ' :

32~ :
, :

10533~4 REPRODUCER FIGURES

Figure 1' is a reduced scale right side elevationof the reproducer with the cover and a portion of the base frame cut away for clarity.
Figure 2' is a reduced scale le~ side elevation of the reproducer with the cover and portions of its frame cut away.
Figure 3' is a fragmented reduced scale top plan view of the machine's frame members.
Figure 4' is a fragmented detailed top view of the carriage moving mechanism, showing its connection with the typewriter.
Figure 5' is a right side elevational view of the carriage moving mechanism, and showing further frasmented portions of the typewriter frame and paper carriage.
Figure 6' is a fragmented sectional right hand view of the carriage moving mechanism's main shaft assembly and frame support therefor, taken on line 6-6 (Fig. 4'), with other parts of the carriage moving mechanism omitted for clarity.
Figure 7' is a front sectional view o~ a third driving section of the carriage moving mechanism, with unrelated parts omitted for clarity, as viewed from line 7-7 (Figs. 5' & 6').
Figure 8' is a fragmented reduced top view of the machine, showing primarily the keyboard and a portion of the paper carriage.

Figure 9' is a fragmentary top view of the keyboard and mechanism under the oover and under the paper carriage.
Figure 10' is a condensed fragmentary top view of the decoder assembly.
Figure 11' is a fragmentary right side view of the basic typewriter, wit~ the carriage cut away, and showing principally the keys, their electrical contacts, type arms and a means for automatic operation of the keys and type arms.
Figure 12' is a fragmentary front view of the type arm support segment and a back space print preventing means.
Figure 13' is a fragmentary left side view -of the mechanism shown in Figure 12' and indicating its location in the machine.
Figure 14' is a fragmentary right side view of the case shift keys, the shit lock and case shifting bail arrangement.
Figure 15' is a condensed fragmentaxy right rear perspective of a portion of the key lock mechanism shown in Figure 14'.
Figure 16' is a fragmentary right side view of the basic typewriter, exclusive of its keyboard, paper carriage and the major part of the carriage moving mechanism.
Figure 17' is a fragmen-~ary left view showing prim.arily a portion of the left end of the pa~er carriage and the normal line space mechanism.

1(~533'-~4 Figure 18' is a fragmentary view showing part of the normal line space mechanism of Figure 17', in an operated position.

Figure 1~' is a condensed fragmentary front view, taken generally on line 19 ~ 19 (Fig. 17l), show-ing principall~ a portion of the normal line space mechanism and the support means therefor.
Figure 20' is a fragmentary front view of the carriage position indicator, the forward support for the carriage, and a carriage mounted adjus.able abutment which cooperates with the margin stops.
Figure 21' i5 a fragmentary front view of ~he carriage return spring arran~ement.
Figure 22' is a rear view of the carriage return spring arrangement, shown also in Figure 21'~
~ igure 23' is a fragmentary right side view of the spring arrangement shown in Figure 21'.
Figure 24' is a fragmentary front sectional view of the carriage moving mechanism, taken on line 24 -24 (Fig. 5~), and showing primarily the carriage return clutch with its foreground support plate shown in phantom.
Figure 2S' is an exploded fragmentary perspective view, showing primarily one of the carriage moving mechanism gear carriers and a planet gear.
Figure 26l is a diagramatic view of the carriage moving mechanism gear train, showing the directions of rotation of the parts.

105;~3;)4 Flgure 27' is a front view, taken on line 27 -27 (Fig. 6'), showing a differential gear train of the carriage moving mechanism.
Figure 28' is a front view, taken on line 28 - 28 (Fig. 6'~, showing another differe~tial gear train of the carriage moving mechanism.
Figure 29' is a sectional front view of the carriage moving mechanism, taken generally on line 29 - 29 (Fig. 51) Figure 30' is a slightly fragment~d sectional front view of the carriage moving mechanism, taken generally on line 30 - 30 (Fig. 5').
Figure 31' is a schematic wiring diagram of the main code reading circuit.
Figure 32' is a fra~mented left sectional view taken on line 32 - 32 (Fig. 9'), showing principally the reader control, the carriage return and the back space keys and their related contxol mechanisms.
Figure 33' is a fragmented top sectional view of a portion of mechanism shown in Figure 32' as viewed f~om line 33 - 33 therein.
Figure 34' is a fragmented left sectional view of the justifying control key as viewed from line 34 - 34 (Fig. 9 7 ) .
Figure 35' is a fragmentary right side view of the back space key and its switches that are also shown from the lert side in Figure 32'.

Figure 36' is a fragmenta,y front view of the back space key and i~s control s.witches that are also shown in Figures 32' and 35'.
Figure 37' is a condensed fragmentary top sectional view of a cycling control assembly taken on line 37 - 37 (Fig. 2l). .
Figure 3~' is a condensed fragmentary top sectional view of a cycling control assembly taken on line 38 - 38 (Fig. 2').
Figure 39' is a sectional view taken on line 39 - 39 (Fig. 37'), showing a cycling unit which is illustrative of a number of such units that form a substantial part of the assembly shown in ~igure 37'.
. Figure 40' is a sectional view taken on ..
line 40 - 40 ~Fig. 37').
: Figure 41' is a sectional view taken on line 41 - 41 (F1g. 38'), showing a different type of cycling unit.
Figure 42' is a sectional view taken on line 42 - 42 (Fig. 38'), showing a cycling unit which is illustrative of a number of such units in the assembly shown in Figure 38'.
Figure 43' is a sectional view taken on line 43 - 43 (Fig. 38'), showing a line delete program cycling . mechanism.
Figure 44' is a sectional front elevation of a print-no print and bold-regular control assembly, as viewed from line 44 - 44 (Fig. 1').

. , . ~, . .. , . . .. . . ....... . , , . .

Figure 45' is a fragmented detailed illustra-¦tion of part of the mechanism shown in Figure 44l.
Figure 46' is a detailed right side rragmenta~y view of part of the mechanism shown in Figure 44'.
Figure 47' is a view of a main decoder switch block as viewed from line 47 - 47 (Fig. 49').
Figure 48' i5 a ~iew taken on line 48 - 48 (Fig. 10'), showing a portion of the main decode~.
Figure 49' is a view of a main decoder portion which typifies various sections of ~he decoder shown in Figure 10', and it sectionally illustrates the switch blocks as viewed from line 49 - 49 (Fig. 47').
Figure 5~0' is a schematic wiring diagram of the decoder shown in Figure 10'.
Figure 51' is a schematic wiring diagram of the circuits for automatically imprinting characters.
Figure 52' is a schematic wiring diagram of the circui~s tha~ are primarily related to cycling contrQl and carriage movement for upper and lower case characters.
Figure 53' is a schematic wiring diagram of the circuits that are relative to cycling contr~1 and carriage movement for automatic code controlled word spaces and nut spaces.
Figure 54' is a fra~men~ary full scale right side view of the word space coun~er which controls justifying in the reproducer and which is also incox-porated in reduced scale in Figure 1'.

- ., ............................. ,~ ,~
-Figure 55' is a fragmentary sectional ~ront view of the counter as seen from line 55 - 55 (Fig. 54').
Figure 56' is a top view ofla pawl-latch ~echanism as viewed from line 56 - 56 ~Fig~ 54').
Figure 57' is a schematic wiring diagram of code controlled circuits for automatically adjusting justifying mechanism.
Figure 58' is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for code controlled upper-lower case shift operations and for cycling certain ineffective codes.
Figure 59' is a fragmentary right side view showing principally a full carriage retur~ switch, an upper-lower case swi~ch means, and an upper-lower case control with portions cut away for clarity.
Figure 60' is a fragmentary front view including a full front view of the upper-lower case switch means and a sectional illustration of the case control as viewed from line 60 - 60 (Fig. 59').
Figure 61' is a front view of the upper-lower case control as viewed from line 61 - 61 (Fig. 1').
Figure 62' is a fragmentary view of some of the mechanism shown in Figure ~0'.
Figure 63 is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for automatic underline imprinting and for automatic "bold" and "regular" shift controls.
Figure 64' is a fragmented sectioned ~iew of the platen taken on its tranverse centerline, and showing pri~arily the line space adjusting clutch.

Figure 65' is a rragmented left side view of an extra line spacing mechanism, and showing its connection with the platen.
Figure 66' is a fragmented detailed view of some of the mechanism shown also in Figure 65'.
Figure 67' is a slightly rag~ented sectioned rear view of the line space mechanism as seen from line 67 - 67 (Fig~ 65').
Figure 68' is a schematic wiring diagram .
of the circuits for manual and automatic control of the extra line space mechanism.
Figure 69' is a slightly fragmented front view of a bold-regular, print-no print control assembly, and also showing the manner in which the assembly is secured on the righthand side of the basic typewriter .
frame. -Figure 70' is a fragmented detailed front view of a key and related control mechanism that is shown obscurely in Figure 63'.
Figure 71' is a fragmented and sectioned right side view of the mechanism shown in Figure 70', as seen from line 71 - 71 (Fig. 70').
Figure 72' is a detailed front view OI a key lock that lS shown only in part in Figure 69'.
Figure 73' is a fra~mented and sectioned left side view of a switch as viewed from line 73 - 73~ig.
6g'). ' .

10533~4 Figure 74' i5 a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for automatic print-no print shifting and code cycling controls and for no print character code cycling controls.
Figure 75' is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for automatically controlled and manually controlled carriage return operations.
Figure 76' is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for automatic code controlled stop printer and line delete operations.
Figure 77' is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for automatic code controlled machine conditioning operations.
Figure 78' is a schematic wiring diagram of circuits for manual forward and back space machine condltionlng operations.
Figure 79' lS a schematic wiring diagram of~circuits for manually controlled character and space back-spacing operations.

~1)53374 The following Charts "A" - "E" are referred t~ ¦
occasionally in the detailed description, and they are listed here so they may be readily found.

CHART_A
DIFFERENTIAl CHARACTER AND WORD SPACING

~ifferent sized Carriage characters combined on related keys, Groups Movement ____ A. Upper Case .100" " C $ % ? & ( ) * W M and .100" nut~sPac2 Lower Case .100" 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 w m . .
B. UC .050" ' LC .100" 7 C. UC .100" Q E R T Y U O P A S ~ F G H J K Z XCVBN
LG .075" q e r t y u o p a s d f g h j k z xc~bn -. UC .0751' I
~C .050" i E. UC .lQ0" L
LC .050" 1 F. UC .050" : - / and .050" Nut space, and Space Bar LC .050 : , .

G. UC .075"
.075" nut space.
LC .075"

NOTE: The above includes all of the cha~acter keys, except the underline key which does not cause carria~e movement. _ _ _ .. . . .,, .. . .. .. , . . . ,. .. .~ .. .. . ~ . ,.... . .

~HAR~ 33~

CHAR~CTEFI A~ SPA(:~ KEY COD.~S

,Al~ . C0~3 Num~rals ~od~

C 1~7 3 24 D 126 . .4 25 ~3 12 . 5 26 X 135 ~ 234 X - 35 . 9 2~5 : ~ 156 0 236 M 246 Punc~ua- ~ on ~ 167 ~ ., ) 36 O ~7 ~ 45 ;` P 123 ` ( ~ 34q Q 1 Spac~Q . `
. . R 1~ . .050'i Nut Spac~,, S46 S . ~25 .Oq5" Mut Sp~cs, 1~57 14 .100" Nut Spac~ ~ 247 U 16 Word Space(Space,P,Pr)3 W æ37 . .
X 146 :

. . Z 14;5 Ur~derlins 1456 . '' , ~ ~ ' ' , , 43 ~

,.,, . . - - - -105;~37~ ~

CHART C
JUSTIFICATION CODES:

QUOTIENT CODE THEREFOR REMAINDERCODE THEREFOR

1 ~ -- 5 1 -~ 7 2 ---------- 6 2 -~ - 67 3 ---------- 256 . 3 --~---------- 267

4 ~ 356 4 --------~---- 257

5 ---------- 2356 5 --~ --- 2567

6 --------- 2346 6 ~ ------ 357

7 ---------- 2345 7 ------------- 367

8 --------- 2456 8 ------------- 2357

9 ---------- 3456 9 -----~ --- 2367

10~ ------ 1256 10------------- 3567

11~ --- 1345 11 ~ 23567

12 --~ -- 1346 12 ------~ -- 37

13 ----~ - 1356 13 ------------ 23~7

14 ---~ -- 13456 14 ------------ 2~57

15 ------~-- 1234 15 ------------ 2467

16 --------- 1235

17 --------- 1236

18 ~ 1245

19 ~ ---- 1246

20 ----~ - 12456

21 --------- 1~345

22 --------- 12356

23 --------- 12346 CHART D

FUNCTION CODES
FUNCTION CODE
Carriage return.................................. 1237 Line Delete..... ~................................ 3457 Clear (Normal)................................... 3467 Line space....................... ~............... 4 Rev. Line space............................... ... 45 Upper case....................... ~............... 46 Lower case....................... ~............... 47 No Print................................. ........ 456 Print.................................... ........ ~57 Bold face................................ ........ 467 Delete, any code &,...................... ........ 4567 Stop printer............................. ........ 56 BacX space func.......................... ........ 57 Regular face............................. ........ 567 ~ ' .
CHART E

CONDITION CODES

~1) Lower case, Regular face and Print, 1,3,4,7 (2j Upper case, Regular face and Print, 1,3,6,7 (3) Lower case, Bold face and Print, 1,3,5,7 (4) Upper case, Bold face and Print, 1,2,4,7 (5) Lower case, Regular face and Wo-print, 1,5,5,7 (6) Upper casej Regular face, and No-print, 1,2,6,7 (7) Lower case, Bold Face and No-print, 1,4,6,7 ( 8 ! ~pper case, Bold Face and No-print, 1,2,5,7 ~ 105337~ ~

DETAILE~ DESCRIPTION
In the preferred form of the invention, the mechanisms of the composing machine are assembled together as oneunit, as shown in Figure 1.

GENERAL FRAME MEMBERS
The composing mach.ine ls assembled on a four sided base 1 (Figs. 1 and 2)~ A centrally located transverse T-shaped member 2, and another such member 3 in inverted attitudes, are secured at their ends to the side rails of the base 1 with member 3 located rearward from member 2.

A~ upper frame assembly 8 fox supporting various mechanisms is comprised of a shelf member 9 with four legs 10 (Fig. 21. Two channel members 13 and 14, in spaced positions parallel to the sides of the base, are secured at their forward ends to the front rail of the base 1 ana at their rearward ends to the transverse member 2. A standard typewriter frame 15 is assembled on the a~annel members.

2. ST~NDARD TYPEWRITER
A standard office typewriter ~nde~wood #5) is selected to illustratively indicate that any commercially developed typewr~.ter may be adapted for ~se as a oomponent in the combinations disclosed herein. ~Reasonably, therefore, the well known parts of the selected typewriter are explained :

briefly and all modifications thereof and additions thereto are described in detail.
Other commercially developed typewriters can be employed in place of the selected strictly mechanical Underwood #5. Motor driven typewriters have a spinning rotary platen and latch-controlled cam drive arrangements and other self powered types can be employed for performin~ the operations of typing and handling the paper the same as those performed herein by manual or electromechanical drive means without departing from the spirit of the invention. 'rhe selected typewriter is equipped with a shiftable paper carriage r but it will become apparent that any typewriter, including those with shiftable imprinting means or other means for coordinating characters and spaces on a print receiving means to compose a line o text instead of the illustrated shiftable carriage, may be incorporated.
The keyboard, within the standard t:ypewriter frame lS (Fig. 2) is comprised of a nearly standard arrangement of keys as shown in Figure 3.
Regular character keys 16 are adapted to be actuated for accordingly imprinting the appropriate character and for causing the paper carriage to be moved the appropriate letter space amount, which movement being differentially variable and corresponding to the particular key and theupper or lower case condition of the machine.
Shift keys 17 and 18 are arranged for case shifting.

An underline key 19 is actuated for imprinting an underline mark in both upper and lower case conditions of the machine, but it does not cause carriage movement as do the normal character keys 16.
A line space key 20 does not cause lonsitudinal carriage movement, but it is actuated for causin~ forward line space rotation of the platen in the composing machine and for causing ~orward line space encoding and, therefore, corresponding control in the reproducer. A reverse line space key 21 is actuated manually for causing reverse line space rotation of the platen and for causing reverse line space encoding.
A ShiLt lock 22, is actuated for holding the machine in upper-case condition until a shift key is actuated for releasing the lock.
The character keys 16 and the underline key 19 are carried by key levers 23 (Fig. 4? which, when actuated, operate bell-cranks 24 and type arms 25 through a well known type-actuating arrangement.
Whenever a character key 16 or the underline key 19 is depressed, its key lever 23 pivots downwardly about the rod 26, the lever compresses its spring 32 slightly, and the stud 33, is swung downward. The downwa~d movement of stud 33, acting on the bifurcation in the forward extension of the bell-cran}; 24, causes the bell-crank to pivot counterclockwise about the rod 35. Counterclockwise movement of bell-crank 24 auses its st~d 36 to move forward, and acting on the forward side of slot 37, moves the type-arm 25 clockwise to perform the usual printing procedure of striking the ink ribbon and the paper against the platen. When the depressed key is allowed to return, the reverse directions for returning the printing mechanism are assured by the spring 32 assisted by the effect of gravity on the type-arm and the leverages developed by the type-arm and bell-crank.
The typewriter chosen for illustrative purposes is the well known kind wherein ~e platen is shif~able up or down under control of the case shift keys. However, a typewriter wherein the type arm segment assembly .is moved in relation to the platen for case shifting purposes could just as well be used.
The sh.ift key 18 is carried by a lever 42, which is fulcrumed at its rearward end on the rod 26, and it is urged upwardly to normal position by one of the springs 32.
Lever 42 has a vertical arm 43 adapted for affecting a case shifting bail arrangement which will be explained presently.
The shift key 17, located to the left of the character ke~ group,;is carried by a key lever 44. This lever has the same general characteristics as those described for lever 42 above. Lever 44 has a vertical arm 45 like arm 43 on lever 42 t and lever 44 is also pivoted on rod 26 and it is u~ged to return by a spring 32.

~L~533~
Depression of the shift key 18 moves the lever 42 and its arm 43 clockwise about rod 26. This movement of arm 43 shifts the bail arrangement clockwise about the axis OI
rod 46 and raises the rod 47 to its upper case position.
Depression o~ shift key 17 accomplishes the same result through its lever 44, arm 45 and the bail arrangement.
Elevation of bail/47 causes the platen to be elevated to upper case position through well known means.
The weight of the platen and carriage born means by which the paper carriage platen is moved upward is, to a large extent, counterbalanced by a spring 51.
A locking means is provided for preventing the bail arrangement from being pivoted out of the lower case position unless a shift key is operated. Whenever the shift key lever 42 is pivoted downward, its pin 68 ~Fig. 7) in cooperation`with cam surface 66 moves the unit comprising members 61-64 counterclockwise about the axis of sha~t 61.
The same action takes place when the shift key ~lever 44 and ltS pin 67 are moved downwardly. Whenever the members 61-64 are turned counterclockwise, the arm 69 rocks the pivotal member 57 (Fig. 6) counterclockwise for elevating the detent 56 and raising its blocking surface 60 (Fig. 4) clear of the stud 54. The blocking surface 60 is raised to its ineffecti~e position at or about the time the operated shift lever and its arm 43 or 45 begins to move the bail arrangement :, .. .. .. ,... ~.. , ~.,....... ... ~. .' 10533'74 to the upper case position as described.
The machine may also be shifted to upper case condition by manual or automatic operation of the shift lock key 22. ~hen member 70 (Fig. 7) is in its normal clockwise rest position, the surface 76 is angularly spaced from stud 68 for allowing limited counterclock~ise rocking of member 70 about its pivot bolt 71. When the shift lock 22 is depressed, it first causes the member 70 to rock counter-clockwise against the tension of light sprins 74 un~il the surface 76 contacts the stud 68, and then it causes the shift lever 42 to move downward shi~tin~ the machine to the upper case condition as previously descYibed.
Customarily, the machine is locked in the upper case condition, when the shift lever 42 is moved downward by operation of the shift lock 22. Under this condition, when the shift lever 42 moves downward, latch surface 77 on the member 63 is adapted to latch over the pin 68. The machine is thu5 held in the uppèr case position until the hook member 63 is again pivoted counterciockwise. The shift lock may be released by depression of ~he shift key 17 (Fig. 5), which lowers shift lever 44 and its pin 67, (Fig. 7).
The machine is then free to return to the lower case condition as the shi~t key 17 (Fig. 6) is again re~urned to normal position.
The well known paper carriage of the typewriter 10533'~4 ill strated herein, by way o ex~mple, is comprised of a ¦
generally rectangular shaped transversely movable main carrier ~0 (Fig. l) and a vertically shiftable platen carrier 81, which is guided in the base carrier.
The platen carrier 81 (Figs.l a~d 8) is comprised of left and riaht end plates which lie in vertical planes, and transverse members (not shown) ~onnecting the ~wo end plates to form a rigid frame. The specific construc~ion of the transverse members, the compression rollers and other parts whlch guide the paper around the platen, form no part of the invention and are not described in detail.
In the illustrated embodiment, the platen carrier 81 (Fig. 8) is mounted for being raised and lowered in relation to the base carrier 80 for case shifting; upper and lower case, respectively.
A wheel 99 and a follower plate lO0 are connected to the transverse members of the platen carrier for holding the platen carrier in upper and lower shifted positions as controlled by the case shifting bail ar~angement.
By the just described whael 99, follower and platen carrier, the platen is shifted up or down in unison with the case shifting bail rod 47 for positioning the platen in either upper or lower case position, respectively, as when a shift key 17 or 18 (Fig. 3) is operated or released, ~, .

10~3374 respectively, as explained.
The carriage is moved leftwardly during normal forward operations by a spring means lOl (Figs. 9 and lO) which is identical to the spring means in the standard Underwood typweriter.
To return the carriage, the operator merely moves the usual lever lll ~Fig. 3) rightwardj as indicated by the axrow "R'', for normal one, two or three li~e space rotation of platen 90, by well known mechanism, controlled by the position of a presettable button 112, and for thereafter returning the carriage. In respect to carriage return t the above is customary as far as the immediately affected mechanism is concerned and as far as the operator is concerned. However, in this invention this operation excites novel automatic mechanism in the machine ~or loqklng keys, for punching a carriage return code in the control tape, for performing justifying ~perations, etc., as will be explained later herein.

.
. :. ' 105;~3'74 3. CHARACTER KEY SWITCHES
_ Depression of any one character key 16 (Fig. 4), at the bottom of its stroke when imprinting on the paper carriage occurs as explained, closes a set 113 of elec~rical switch blades for controllin~ carriage movement and for punching a code, both appropriate to the operate~ key.
To facilitate understanding of the switch arrange- -men~, under each of the above mentioned character keys 16, and undex space keys to be described la~er, a chart showing particular grouping of the keys as indi~ated acc~rding to the amount o~ carriage movement for each key in an associated gr.oup, in upper case and in lower case, i5 shown herebelow and also in "Chart A" among the Charts "A" - "E" to be found immediately following the Figure Descriptions hereina~ove.
~ '' ~ ~ : .

CHART A :
DIFFERENTIAL _HARACTER AND WOR3 SPACING
' :.
Different sized Carriage characters combined on related keys, aro~ Movement ~

A. Upper Case .100" " # S ~ ? ~ ( ) * W M and .100" nut space.

Lower Case .100" 1 2 3 ~ 5 6 8 9 0 w m B. UC .05Q" ' LC .100" 7 c uc .loo~ Q E R T Y U O P A S D F G H J K Z X C V ~ ~
LC .075" q e r t y u o p a s d f g h j k z x c Vbn ~HART A (Cont'd) Different sized Carriage characters combined on related keys, Movement and Spaces un D. UC .075" I

LC .050"

E. UC .100" L

LC .050" 1 F, UC .050" : - / and .050" Nut space, and Space Bar.

LC .050" ; , .
., G. UC .075"
.075" nut space. .
LC .075 ~ote: The above includes all of the character keys, except the underline key which does not cause carriage movement.
:
~ ~ One switch blade 114 (Fig. 4), ~Gr exa~ple~, for each key 16 is connected:by, a wire 115 (Fig, ll) to another wir.e, designated as being for the group "A" - "G", depending on the group in which the particular key is listed in the chart above. ~The wires for the groups "A" - "G' are individually employed to eause the proper amount of carxiage movement, as will be explained in connection with the carriage moving mechanism and the upper-lower case switch means.
Other switch blades 116, 117 an~ lL8, in each set 113 (Fig. 4), are connected as by wires 119, 120, and 121, (Fig. 11) respectively, with the appropriate code channel punch wires (1 - 7) that are employed for causing punching of .. - ~ ' : '' ~0533~9L

the code that corresponds with the operated key. More or less switch blades 116 - 118 may be employed to ac~ommodate the co~e for a particular key, it being necessary merely to have one such blade for each channel in the code.
By referring to the "C~RACTER AN~ SPACE KEY CODES"
(Chart Bl below and also among the charts "A" - "E" that follow the Figure Descriptions, it can be seen that all character keys, except the underline key, require three channels or less. Therefore, most keys re~uire the four blades 114, 116, 117 and 118 cr less.

CHART B
. , . .
CHARACTER AND SPACE KEY CODES

. Alphabet Code Al~habet Code . L 3 : Z 145 M 246 Underline 14~6 iO533'~ 1 CHART B (Cont'd) N ME~ALS
Code Code : 6 2~5 . 8 . 234 : 9 235 ~ : : ' : : ' ' ~: Punctuatlon t , ) ~ 36 :~ ~ ( ) 347 Spaces :
.050" Nut Space, 347 .075" ~ut Space,: 1457 .100" Nut Space, ~47 :~ Nord Space tSpace Bar) 34 : :
.
: , ' 10533'74 For example, the letter "K" has a code of channels 1, 3 and 7, as shown on the Chart B, therefore, its switch ~ust include all four blades, as shown schematically in Fig. 11. Furthermore, in respect tv the letter "K'l, it can be seen that upon operation of the key and closing of contact 114 with contacts 116 117, the wire 115 and the carriage movement control wire "C" is connected with wires 119, 120 and 121 and the Code Channel punch wires 1, 3 and 7. In this manner, the control for a group "C" carriage movement as shown on the "DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTER AND WORD
SPACING" (Chart A), and the control for punching the code 1, 3, 7, for the letter "K" as indicated in the "CHAR~CTER
AND SPACE KEY CODES" (Chart B) are established.
Thus~ a detailed description of a four bladed switch 113 will suffice for all characters except the Underline key, which will be described later. The blades for each switch 113 (Fia. 4) are mounted on parallel insul~tors 122. Spacers 125, on rods lZ3 and 124, situate the insulat~rs ,ransversely under their respective keys. The individual switches 113 are arranged;in 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th echelons, Figs. 4 and 12, on their insulators 122 and do not interfere with each other.
~ epending conductors 126 ~Fig. 4) are riveted to insulators lZ7 and are located on respective key levers in such positions that they engage the blades of switch 113, ~' 10533~74 which is ~ssociated with the key, upon depression of the key.
The underline key 19 (Fig. 12) only causes imprinting of an underline mark and punchingiof a code on the tape. For the last mentioned function, the underline key has a switch means 128 (Fig. 13), which has ive blades instead of foux or less. The switch 128 (Fig. 13) has blades 114, 116, 117 and 118, and one more blade 129 required to accommodate a four channel code. Also, a conductor 130 contacts the blade 129. ~lade 129, which is displaced rearwardly on its insulator 122, does not interfere with the adjacent switches 113 (Fig. 4), since the switch 128 (Fig. 13) for the underline key 19 is looated generally in the "lst"
echelon of switches (Fiy. 12) while the switch for the reverse line space key 21, immediately to the right of the underline key, and the switch for the "*/O" key 16, im~ediately to the left, are located in ~he "3rd" and "4th"
echelons, respectively.
.
., 4. CHARACTER REY CIRCU~TS

Since the character key circuits are relatively complex, due to various conditions, a most normal path of the current will first be described briefly. The control keys and mechanisms, ~hrough which the current travels, will be referred to briefly, and the order in which the various ' -10533';'4 control keys and mechanisms are introduced will later serve as a general outline for detailed descriptions of these various parts.
Upon depression of any character key 15 (Figs. 3 ¦and 11~ and the consequent closing of its switch 113 (Fig. 4), as explained, the current travels from a source and a wire 137 (Fig. 11) to a normally closed switch means under a tape return key 138.
~ ormally, the tape return key is not operated and the character key circuit passes therethrough without incidence. However, when the tape return key is operated, as required after deleting, to advance deleted tape through the main punches as will be explained, the character key circuit is broken thereby for preventing codinglon the tape and carriage movement that might otherwise be effected by misuse of a character key during tape return.
From the tape return key switch, the circuit normally continues via a wire 139 and normally closed switoh under control of a delete key 140. Operation of the delete key renders the normal character key circuit ineffective, thus preventing normal forward operations during deleting and automati~ back-spacing operations, as will be explained.
The circuit normally continues via a wire 141, between the delete key and a justifying on-off key and . ..

ll - 6 -~ )53374 comm~tator mechanism 142. ~ormally, the mechanism 142 is in "on" condition for controlling the machine to code for justifying and for directing the charac~er key circuit, among others, so that it may perform features of the justi~ying system. When the mechanism 142 is in "off"
condition, the character key circuit is directed to avoid performance of some of the justifying operations, as will be ex~lained.
When the mechanism 142 is in normal 'lon" position, it directs the character key circuit through a wire 143 to a punch control key arrangement 144~ Normally, arrangement 144 is in punch "on" condition, in which it permits punching of the codes for the te~t and for justlfying information.
In "off" cond1tion, the arrangement 144 alters various circuits to avoid punching of the codes ~or the text and to avoid normal operat~on of justifyinq mechanism~
~ When arrangement 14~ is in normal punch "on"
condition, it directs the character key circuit via a wire 145 to a control commutator means 146 for preventing occurrence of a space or underline at the end of a justified line, as will be explained. The commutator means 146 automatlcally becomes effective-only when a line has progressed to less than .700" ,rom the right mar~in, as will be e-~plair,ed.
Thus, it may be said that commutator mea~s 1~6 is, normally ., .~ ... ......

neffective to excite further mechanism in the performaDce o~ the feature.
Normally, the commutator means 146 directs the character key circuit through wires 147 and 148 to a carriage moving mechanism 149, which responds to the circuit and thereby moves the carriage appropriately for the operated character key 16.
Wires 150, 151 and 152, leading from the mechanism 149, are individually employed for controlling the mechanism 149 to move the carriage two (.050"), three (.075") or four (.100") units, respectively, to accommodate the operated one o~ the keys 16.
The wires 150, 151 and 152 lead to relays 153, 154 and 155, respectively, provided for operating a differential key lock mechanism when the carriage nears the end of a line, às will be expl~ined.
: Wires 156, 157 and 158 connect the relays 153, 154 and 155, respectively, with an upper-lower case snap switcn means 159, which together with the selecti~ity of the operated character key, determi~es which one of the wires 150, 151 and 1i2 will be employed.
The character key group wire~ "A" - "G" lead from the switch means 15~, as discussed previously, and these are the wires to which the character key wires 115 are connected, , ~533'74 ~ ~
as described. Thus, the character key circuit passes throush the switch means 159, the employed group wires "A" - "G", the wire 115, and the blade 114 engaged under the operated character key as described. At th s point, the circuit divides and is directed from the bIade 114, through the blades 116 - 118 (for example) engaged under the operated key, and through the wires 119 - 1~1 (for example) to the appropriate "code channel punch wires" 1 ~ 7, which cox~espond to the code for the operated key as descrlbed.
The circuits that may pass through the code channel punch wires 1 - 7 normally lead thrcugh individual switches in a group 160 of such switches, which are part of the Punch~Control Xey Arrangement 144 as will be explained, and on to respective individual solenoids in a main punch mechanism 161 for;punching the code ~or the operated key 16 on the code medium as will be explained.
common~ground wire 162, for the main punch solenoids, directs the circuit to a normally closed single throw awitch in the punch, no-punch key means 144. The arrangement is such that, when the means 144 is set for "no-punch" and the single throw switch is open, the punches 161 will not operate, even tho~ugh current passes through an operated key 16 as will be explained later.
Normally however, the character key circuit passes through the means ~144, and, via a wire 163, it is directed . .

~ 10533~4 to a double-throw time delay switch 164 under the delete key 140, which will be described later.
Normally, the circuit travals through switch 164 and a wire 165 to an end of line tape feed control means 166, which is bxought into play for altering the circuit only at the very end of a line, as will be described.
During the normal typing of the majority of a line, the character`key circuit impulses travel through the control means 166 and a wire 167 to a solenoid 168, and ~o ground in a orward t~pP cycling control means 169. Thus, the solenoid 168 operates the forward tape cycle control means 169 to advance the cantrol tape one step for each impulse thr,ough the character key circuit, all as will be explained more fully hereinafter.

5. TAPE RE~U~N KEY S~RUCTUR~
~ .
The tape return key 138 is located on the extreme left of the keyboard as shown in Fig. 3, near the delete key 140. These two keys are arranged conveniently near each other to mini~ize hand travel, since the tape return will be used to feed the deleted tape through the punches, immediately after the delete key is used, as will be more readily under-stood after further description of the system and of the several components.

105337~4 The lower bi~urcated ends of the blades 176-179 (Fig. 14) are pressed rightwardly to normally engage a row "N" of contacts, when the tape return key and its lever 170 are in normal position. When the key 138 and the lever 170 are depressed to operated position, the ~lades 176-179 are each engaged with respective pairs of contacts in a row "O".
The contacts in rows "N" and "O" are secured in an insulator .
180. . ~
Pawl 186 is provided for holding the tape return key 138 and its lever in operate~ position until the tape is .
returned, following a deleting operation. Upon operation of the le~er 170,:stud 183 coacts with surface lB4 and rotates the pawl 186 counterclockwise, until the làtching. surface 185 swings:clockwise over the stud 183 as the pawl returns under tension of its spring 188 at a~out the time lever 170 reaches~
operated position.~The stud~190 is situated to positively stop:lever 170 at a bit past operated position. Thus, the pawl 186 holds the lever 170 in operated posltlon, and it holds~the lever in this position until the deleted and back-spaced tape is fed forwardly through the main punches as will be explained.
The circuitry~for automa~ically releaslng the tape xeturn key~will be explained later. Howe~er~ the releasing mechan1sm will be explained now. Operation of solenoid 191 draws itsarmature and link forwardly, and thus rotates arm .:

10533~4 196 and pawl 186 counterclockw.ise for removing the surface 185 from above the stud 183. In this manner, the lever 170 is released to return to the illustrated normal position, under tensio~ of its spring 174. Counterclockwise movement of the pawl 186 is limited by stud 190 after the pawl is unlatched. Upon deenergization of solenoid l91, pawl 186 is returned by its spring 188. A forwardly e~tending portion 197 of the lever 170 is provided for cooperating with a ball-lock arrangement, which permits operation of the tape return key, only when no other conflicting key is operated, as will be explained later.
As previously described, a character kèy circuit normally travels from a source and a wire 137 (Fig. 11) to a normally closed switch means under the tape return key 138.
Normally with the tape return key 138 in the illustrated position, the character key circuit travels via wire 137, contact 198 (~ig. }~), blade 176, contact 200 and continues via wire 139.
Operation of the tape return key 138 and i~s lever 170 disengages blade 175 from the contacts 198 and 200, and thus the character key circuit through wire 139, described above, is rendered inoperative until the tape return key is restored.
The remaining contacts in rows "N" and "O" will be lescribed further in connection with their resp ctive circuits.

~S33~ `
6 . DELETE KEY STP~ CTIJRE

The delete l;ey 140 (Figs. 11 and 15) is located to the right of the tape return key 138 (Fig. 3). .~ :
Delete key 140 is ca~ried by a lever 201 (Fig. 15).
A torsion spring 202, anchored in any well known manner, is a~sembled about rod 171 and connected to lever 201 for .~.
urging the lever to the illustrated normal position.
Three switch blades 203, 204 and 205 are secured to but insulated from lever 201~ The lower bifurcated ends o~
blades 203, 204 and 205 are pressed rightwardly to engage respective pairs o~ contacts 206, 207; 208, 209, and 210 and ~:.
211, when the delete key and its lever is in the illustrated normal position. When the delete key is depressed and its lever is accordingly pivoted clockwise about rod 171 to operated position, the blades 203, 204 and 205 are disengaged from the contacts 206-211, .and they are engaged with ...
respective pairs of contacts 212, 213; 214, 215, and ?16 and 217.
,;~' ' .
The contacts 206-217 are secured on insulator 218 which is secured on plate 173.
The character key circuit.wire 139 is connected .
with contacts 212 and 206, and the wire 141 is connected with contact 207. Thus, when the delete key is not operated and ~.
the lever 201 is in normal position, as shown, the normal ' -67- ` ~

.. . .
' ~

S337~

character key circuit is completed bet-~een wires 139 and 141, as described, by contact 206, blade 203 and contact 207.
Moreover, it can be seen that the circuit through wire 141 is rendered ineffective by depression of the delete key, and the resulting clockwise pivoting of lever 201 and disengage-ment of blade 203 from the contacts 206, 207.
The utility of the contacts 208-217 will be explained later, in connection with the various circuits involved therewith.
~pon depression of the delete key, the lever 201 is held in operated position by a pawl 220. This holding action is momentary, it being only sufficient to assure completion o~ a cyc]e of back-space reading, back-spacing and deieting as will be described làter. When the delete key and le~er 201 are operated, pîn 222 is moved downward where latch sur~ace 224 moves forward as pawl 220 i5 moved forward .,:
by spring 223 to hold pin 222 and lever 201 in operated position for the remainder of the cycle.
At the end of each delete cycle, pawl 220 is reciprocated to release the lever 201~ However, if the .
operator holds the delete key in operated position, pawl 220 is moved by spring 223 to relatch the lever at the beginning -o an ensuing cycle.
At the end of each delete cycle, a solenoid 225 is 3 momentarily energized, for reciprocating the pawl 220.
" . , ' ~ .

- , ~ .
' :
` ,~ ' ', 3'~4 .
Energi2ation o~ solenoid 225 draws armature 226, link 227 and the pawl 220 rea~ard until the pawl contacts stop 228, in which position surface 224 is disengaged from pin 222.
At this point, if the operator has removed his finger from the delete key, the lever 201 is released to the action of return spring 202 and all deleting cycles stop. However, if the operator still holds the delete key in operated position, at the time solencid 225 is deenergized, t~e spring 223 returns pawl 220 to latching position, where surface 224 overlies pin 222, for an ensuing operation.

''; '~',,' '""
7. JUSTIFYI~G ON-OFF KEY -`
.'~
Though the mechanism 142 (Fig. 17) may be considered a separate entity, it is incorporated, for convenience with the amount left in line mechanism assembly (Fig. 18).

.. , , ~ .
The main fram~work of this assembly will be described.
A frame plate 229 (Figs. 2 and 18) of this assembly lS adjustably secured to the standard typewriter fr~me 15. This plate, and the assembly supported thereby, is vertically adjustable.
A justifying key 244 (Figs. 17 and 18) is provided for pe~mitting the operator to determine whether the . . .. ~ :
reproduced copy will be justified or not, for the production of newspaper copy or for an informal letter, respectively, `',~."
~" , .. . .. . .
''''~' .
,.. .... ... . .... .

~ a)533~
for example. ~len the justifying Xey is in the "On"
position, ~echanisms are nonnally controlled to count word spaces, to register th~ amoun-t left in a line and to punch justifying information upon return of the carriage~ ~hen -the key is in the "off" position, word spaces are not counted and the amount left in the line mechanism, though it may be actuated with the carriage, it is not utilized, and no justifying info~mation will be punched in the tape.
Since an accurate count of word spaces and measuring of the amount left in the line is required for justifying and since the justifying key is manipulative for rendering the mechanisms for accounting for this inform~tion effective or lnefective, a locXing means ls provided for preventing manipulation of the justifying key between the time w~len the line is started and when the line is complete and the carriage is returned. This locking means is rendered effective simultaneously with the first carriage moving operation in the line. Accordingly, manipulation of the justif~ing key .i , is prevented following the first occurrence of carriage movement in the line. The locking means, thus rendeLed effec~ive, will remain effective until the carriage is fully returned.
The justifying key 2 ~ (Figs. 3, 17 and 13) is normally in the justifying "On" (clockwise) position, as ,- :
shown, and it is shiftable to the indicated justiying "Off" ; ~
" ''' ~:": ' , -~0- ~ "'' ' ................................ ' ' .... . . .. . . . .. .. . , ... .. . . ... ., . ., , . ~ . . .. . ... .. .

~5337~
(counterclockwise) position.
When the justiying Xey 244 and its member 246 are in the illustrated "On" position, the roller 249 lodges in an indentation 251 on member 246 for tending to keep the :
member and key in that position. Similarly, when the key and member are shifted to the indicated "Off" position the . :.
roller lodges in indentation 252-on.membex 246 for tending .~ :~
to keep the member and key in the "Off" position.
A locking means is provided for preventing the .
counterclockwise yielding of roller 249, at times when the ..
justifying key should not be shifted and when suc'n shi~ting ^~
might bring about incorrect justification. -.When the lock 255 is pivoted counterclockwise, its surface 254 is shifted over roller 249 for blocking counter-clockwise movement of the roller out of the indentation 251 or 252, and thus the justifying key 244 is locked in either the "On" or the "Off" position, respectively~
A latch means 262, provided for holding the lock in~e~fective position, is pivoted on shaft 242, and it is ..
urged cloc~tise toward latching position ~y a torsion spring 263 which is anchored in a well known manner and connected to .
latch 262. Upon return.of the carriage, the latch is moved .
to the unlatched countercloc~tise po~ition shown and, ~here- .:
after, the lower extremity of the latch 262 returns to rest .
against a pin 264 secured on arm 256~ U.pon first movement of . .

.. . . . ' ~'" ,.

..,:

,: ' .
,. . ... , ,,. . . , ... , .... . .... . ... ~ .. .. ...... . . .

~ 33~
the carriage andoperation o~ solenoid 259 (Fig. 17), as discussed, latching surface 265 slides under pin 264 as spring 263 rotates the latch clockwise at the tirne the lock 255 reaches efective position. Thus, lock 255 is held in effective position, by latch 262, until the line is complete and the ~arriage is returned.
Upon return of the carriage, a pin 266 secured on a member 267 is swung counterclockwise about shaft 242, as will be explained later, to contact and rotate latch 262 counterclockwise for removing latch surface 265 from under pin 264 and p~rmitting spring 258 to return the lock 255 clockwise to the normal position shown.
From the above, it can be saen that the justifying key 244 can be manipulated, when the carriage is fully returned, but it can not be manipulated after the occurrence of a carr~ ge movement for the next line. The circuits and other related mechanism for operating the solenoid 259 to lock the key 244 and for operating member 267 and pin 266 to release the latch 262 will be explained in greater detail als~-here h2rain.
'' :',`~ :
A switch means for controlling the solenoid 259 j to operate only once, simultaneously wlth the first carriage ~` `
movement in each li~e includes insulating contact sup o~t plate 271 which is stationary in the machine.
In the illustrated normal position of latch 262, blade 268 connects the contacts 269 and 270. Thus, when ~
`,' ,:

.: :

'' 1C)~3374 carriage movement is first effected, current passes via the wire 148 (Fig. 11 as explained), and further via wire 272, the contact 269 (Fig. 17), the blade 268, contact 270, a wire 273, solenoid 259 and via a wire 274 (Fig. 11~ leading ;
to the carriage moving mechanism 149 as will be explai~ed.
As soon as solenoid 259 (Fig. 17) has rendered lock 255 effective, latch 262 operates disen~aging blade 268 fr~m the contacts 269, 270 to deenergize the solenoid. The circuit thus broken remains broken until the carriage is fully returned. Counterclockwise rotation of latch 262 to returned position restores blade 268 into registration with contacts 269, 270 to complete the circuit for an ensuing operation as described.
..

8. JUSTIFYING KEY SWITCH MEA~JS

The above described justifying key structure is provided for ~perating the switch means ~:?hich controls the machine for justi~ying "On" or "Off" conditions.
At present, it is sufflcient to understand that the insulating plate 271 and the contacts therein are stationary, while the member 277 and the switch blades thereon are shiftable clockwice from the illustrated .
justifying "On" position, to the justifying "Off" position, upon counterclockwise manipulation of the justifying key 244 and the member 246. Lik~wise, when the Xey 244 is again - -., ', . ~:
. ~ . - ~' -73 _ .

.. . . . . . . .. . . ... . . . . , ~

~L~5337~
shifted clockwise, the switch blade member 277 is returned counterclockwise to the illustrated justifying "On"
position.
It may be recalled that the character key circui-t normally passes throu~h wire 141 (Fig. 11), through the justifying key arrangement 142 and wire 143. The means for conducting this part o~ the circuit through the arrange- ;~
ment 142 will now be described.
When the key 244 (Fig. 17~ is shi~ted to "Off"
po~ition, the blade support member 277 and insulator 281 are shifted clockwise, as described, for shifting the blade 284 off of the contacts 282 and 285, and for shifting the blade into engagement with the contact 283 and a separate contact 286 that is also secured on plate 271. Thusl when the justifying key and its switch means are in l'On" position, as shown, and the machine is operated in a forward direction for any character or space, current travels through wire 141, contact 282, blade 284, contact 285 and on through wire 143 (Fi~. 11) that is connected to contact 285 (Fig. 17).
When the justi~ying key and its switch means is shited to "O~f" position, the altered circult is directed through wire 141, contact 283, blade 284, contact 286, and on through a wire 287 which is connected to ccntact 86 and the wire 14~ (Fig. 11) that leads to the carriage moving mechanism 149. Thus, the altered circuit avoids the components ~ .
.

7~
. . . ..

~ 35~'74 144 and 146, but it still completes the circuit to the carriage moving mechanism.
From the above, it can be seen that the character key circuit is directed through wire 148, whether or not the justi~ying key is in "On" or "Off" position. Thus, the parallel circuit through wlre 272, contacts 269, 270 (Fig. 17) wire 273, solenoid 259 and wixe 274 is effective for locking the justifying Xey in either "~n" or "Off" position, upon first forward operation of the carriage moving mechanism as descxibed.
The general outline Gf the no~lal characLer key circuit will now be picked up at the intersection of wires 148 and 287, where wire 148 leads to the carriage ~oving mechanism 149.

"~ .
9. _CAR-IAGE MOVING MECH~ IS~

The carriage moving mechanism is comprised of the spring means lOl (Fig. 9~, previously described, for providing force for forward movement of the carriage, and of ~o~ard differential controlling and differential back-space motivating mechanism, commonly referred to as the carriage moving mechanism 149 (Fig. 11) which is located for the most part between vertical plates 288 and 289 (Fig. 2). The frame 298 (Figs.
10 and 19) and mechanism carried thereon, together with the .;
.. . .

.

~L~S33~ ~
differential space carriage moving mechanism 149 ~Fig. 11) the structure of which is shown particularly in Figs. 10, and 20-27, replaces the customary singular character space escapement mechanism of t'ne Underwood typewriter herein used by way of example.
The transmission gear 296 (Fig. 20) is constantly meshed with a gear 301 which is secured on the forward end of a sleeve 302. A ratchet 303 is secured on the rearward end of sleeve 30~. The ratchet unit, ormed of gear 301, sleeve 302 and ratchet wheel 303, is rotatably mounted on a rod 304, which is secured to plates 288 and 289.
The ratchet wpeel 303 is provided with teeth 305 (Fig. 24), the circulat pitch of which is such that one `
tooth movement of the ratchet results in a one unlt (.025") movement of the carriage as this movement is transmitted to or from the ratchet 3~3 by the rack 292 (Fig. 10), gear 294, s~eeve 295, gears 296 and 301, and sleeve 302 (Fig. 20). The ratio among these gears provides for precise movement of the carriage through control of the teeth 305 (Fig. 24), which are sufficiently larger than the unit movement of the carriage to permit differentiation among the units of movement.
Disengagement of detent 306 (Fig. 24) from ratchet 303 will permit the carriage to move leftwardly by its spring, and when this occurs, pawl 310 and membex 311 are ' ' ', . "' ' ' ' . ''~' :

~. .

l~S337~ ` ~
driven clock~ise by ratchet 303 against the tension of light spring 318 and that it would only be required to provide ~
selective means for arresting member 311 upon movement pro- -portional to the letter space value of characters and spaces in order to control the forward movement of the carriage.
During normal forward operations, solenoid 329 (Fig. 21) is enexgized each time a character or space key is depressed. Energization of solenoid 329 pulls link 330 tFi~. 25) right~ardly to rock bell-crank 323, counterclockwise and to latch its roller 328 on hook 326. The counterclockwise rocking of bellcarnk 323 loads torsion spring 331, which is connected to the belicrank and anchored on rod 309. When ``
the depressed key is restored sufficiently to clear the type arm from the platen and the contacts under the keys are opened, solenoid 329 is deenergized and loaded spring 331 rotates bellcrank 323 clockwise from operated position. The clockwise return operation of bellcrank 37.3 swings its roller 328, pulling engaged hook 326 and bellcrank 324 clockwise~ ~ `
During clockwise operation of bellcrank 324, a stud 332 on the "
rightwardly extending arm of the bellcrank cont~cts a righ~-wardly extending portion 333 (Fig. 24) of the detent 306 for rotating the detent clockwise and out of engagement with the , ratchet 303 ag~inst the light tension of spring 308. The detent 306 and bellcrank 324 (Fig. 25) are held in clockwise operated position until hook 326 is disengaged from roller 328.
.

-77~

:.

.. . . . .. . . .

533'7~L
It will be recalled that the liberation of ratchet 303 (Fig. 24) permits the carriage to traverse left-wardly, rotating ratchet 303, pawl 310 and member 311 clockwise. The means for arresting member 311 at one of its differential angula~ extents, which corresponds to the letterspace value of the depressed character or space key, will now be described.
Two movable stops 334 and 335 (Figs. 10 and 23) are employed. Stop 334 is normally first in order to arrest member 311 (Fig. 24) upon a rotation equivalent to two units (.050") of carriage movement. Withdrawal o~ stop 334 (Fig~
23) out of the path of surface 338 (Fig. 24) permits memher ;~
311 to rotate an additional unit; that is, stop 335 (Fig. 23~ !~
is then first in order to arrest member 311 (Fig. 24) upon -rotation equivalent to three units (.075") of carriage -movement. Withdrawal of both stop 334 and 335 (Fig. 23) `~-permits member 311 (Fig. 24) to travel the equivalent of four units (.100") where surface 320 (Fig. 23) on stationary frame extension 321 is effective to stop member 311 (Fig. 24).
Control of the movable stops is achie-~ed b-~
solenoids 345 and 347 (Figs. 10 and 23). -It will be recalled that detent 306 (Fig. 24) is ~ ;
withdrawn from ratchet wheel 303 upon deenergization o'~-~

solenoid 329 (Fig. 25). Since the solenoids 345 and 347 ..
(Fig. 23~ are at times energized in differential combination - ' r`
'' ..` ' .

. ~ . .

~533~4 with solenoid 329 to control the carriage movement and since at such times their deene.rgization is concurrent with that of solenoid 329 detaining means are provided for holding the operated stop 334, or the stops 334 and 335 as the case may be, in operated ine~fective position until the member 311 ~Fig. 24) is moved against the controlling effective stop as explained.
Restoration of the locking bail 350 and the differential stops 334 and 335 will now be described. ..
Solenoid 360 is energized pulliny link 359 rearward and .
rotating the bail arrangement clockwise ayainst the tension of its spring 353. Bail rod 350 is disengaged from beneath the withdrawn stops 334 and 335, and it swings bail stud 354 below hook detent 355 to return it to the illustrated latching position by spring:356. As bail 350 is swung forwardly, the released stops are returned by their springs 342 and 343. ~ .
Since the bail arrangeme~ is released only when . the required carria~e movement is gr2ater than the narrowest ~ .
.,~
character space, the circuit throuah solenoid 360 is also . closed only when the car~ia~? movement is ~eater than the narrowest character or space.
In the normal position o bellcrank 370 (Fig. 24), switch 377 is open, but upon clockwise rotation of the ~ell- ^.
crank, the disk contacts and closes the swltch just prior to the time furcation 374 contacts the rod 372. Counterclockwisa ... .

-79- .
' .. . . . . . .

~33~
rotation of the bellcarnk permits switch 377 to open. When .:~-member 311 is rotated clockwise the equivalent of two teeth of ratchet 303 (as for two unit, .050" carriage movement) .~. .
and is arrested by stop 334 (Fig. 23), the travel is in-sufficient to cause~hook 361 to latch onto stud 366. However, rotation of member 311 (Fig. 24~ more than two teeth, but less than three teeth will cause hook 361 to cam over stud .
366 for engaging the stud upon counterclockwise return move~
; :
ment of member 311. ~hen hook 361 cams over stud 366 a ` .
depending finger 379 elevates over roller 380, on rod 372, . ~
as member 311 rotate clochwise. Thereafter, when hoo~ 362 . :
is latched on to stud 366 and member 311 returns counterclock~
wise, finger 379 coacts with the roller 380 to rotate hook 361 cl~ckwise for releasing the stud 366. Upon the equivalent of three or four teetll (for three or four units~ clockwise movement of member 311, hook 361 is latched onto stud 366 and ~:
.' .. , ~, finger 379 is lowered clockwise in engaging alignment with roller 380, and, when the member is then returned cloc];wise, hook 361 acts upon stud 366 for rotating member 367, spring 371 and b~'lcranX 370 and ~ts i~sulator 376 cloc~ is~ a~ainst .` .
swi~ch 377 to close the switch before the furcation.374 comes to.rest against rod 372. Switch 377 remains closed for an insta~, while spring 371 is stretched and finger 379 soacts ,~
with roller 380 for rotating ~ook 361 and thus releasing the :.:
stud 366 which automatically opens switch 377 as spring 375 ; .
. .. : . .
. ' ' ,'.: ', -80~

~, .
.. .. . . . .. , . - . -. .

)533~4 rotates bellcranX 370 and member 367 counterclockwise to the position shown. ~-Switch 377 is wired in the same circuit with solenoid 360 (Fig. 10). Thus, when the switch i5 closed, solenoid 360 operates to swing bail 350 from under the forward extension o~ the operated stops 334 and 335 for permitting the stops to be returned by their respective springs 342 and 343. Since the bail arrangement is thus swung clockwise, its stud 35~ is lowered into position to be latched in the normal position when the xeleased stops return at the end of an operation.
Solenoid 329 (Fig. 23) is energized for cocking , , the m~chanism ~or movement and stops 334 and 335 (Fig. 10) `;~
are set when required for controlling the movement upon depression of a character or space key; upon release of the key, detent 306 (FigD 24? ls withdrawn from the ratchet and member 393 (Fig. 27) is rotated to prevent inter~erence of surface 394 with stud 395 while the stud, pawl 310 ~Fig. 24) and member 311 are driven clockwise as the carriage moves;
during this forward movement, hook 361 is latched onto stud 366 when required, andl~ during the last unit of clockwise `~;
, .
movement of member 311, projection 391 (Fig. 26) coacts with tne e~f~ctive di~ferential s~o~ for rotating member 3'36 counterclockwise, rotating belLcrank 383 clockwise., moving ~-~moving stud 381 downward and unlatching hook 326 ~Fig. 25) ,~
.. ' . '' . ., .-. - . . . - ~

~53;37~L :
from roller 328, whereupon spring 325 rotates member 324 for raisiny stud 332 and there~y permitting reengagement of detent 306 (Fig. 24) with the ratchet for preventing ;
further movement of the carriage and permitting member 393 (Fig. 27) to be driven counterclockwise by member 396 (Fig. 23) and solenoid 400 for applying surface 394 (Fig. 27) against stud 395 and disengaging pawl 310 (Fig. 24) from the ratchet and permittin~ counterclockwise return of the member 311; and, during return stroke of member 311, hook 361, when engaged with stud 366 following a three or four unit carriage movement, effects closing of sw-tch 377 to cause disengagem~nt of ~ail 350 (Fig. 10) from the differential stops that may have been operated, hook 361 (Fig. 24) disengages from the stud upon engagement of its finger 379 with roller 380, and, finally, pawl 310 xeengages ratchet 303 as stud 395 rises into xecess 408 (Fig. 27) and member 311 (Fig. 24) comes to rest with . .
its surface 314 stopping against tab 315 and rod 316~ From the above, it can be seen that the carriage is moved ~o~ardly during clockwise movement of member 311 and the mechanism is -~
restored during counterclockwise movement of member 311.
From the above, it should be understood that the .
just described forward differentially controlled operations are performed very rapidly, since all functions lnitiated during the clocXwise stroke of member 311 are complete at the time the me~ber is stopped by the differential stops and since all functions initiated during the return stroXe of the .
,.

... . . .. . . . . . . ... .

~ ~5337~L
member are complete precisely at the time member 311 is fully returned.
The manner in which the normal character Xey circuit operates the above desc~ibed mechanism will now be described.
Switch 409 will open and remain open during clock-wise and counterclockwise reciprocation o~ member 311 and the insulator 411 (Fig. 24) thereon. When a key is depressed and wire 150 (FIg. 11) is effective as determined by the upper-lower case snap switch means 159, current passes via wire 148, normally closed switch 409 (Fig. 24), wire 412, solenoid 329 (Fig. 25) for forward operation cocking of the mechanism, wire 413 (Fig. 11), through wire 150. mhus, when the employed key is released sufficiently to break the circuit ;
solenoid 329 is deenergized and the cocked mechanism is thereby released by spring 331 (Fig. 25), which withdraws detent 306 (Fig. 24) for initiating carriage movement. During the operation of the mechanism, me~ber 311 and insllator 411 are moved clockwise out of normal position, permitting switch 409 to open and thereby rendering ~he circuit inef~ectlve un~
member 311 is returned~and the cycle is complete. Since this circuit runs through wires 412 and 150 (Fig. 11) and avoids ~ifferential stop soleno~ds 345 and 347, ;stop 334 (Fig. 23) remains in effective posltion, carriage movement is limited to two units as member 311 engages surface 336 on .

, ,' ' , ' ' . .

10~i33~4 : ~
stop 334. In a second instance when a key is depressed and wire 151 (Fig. 11) is effective, current passes via wire 148, normally closed switch 4Q9, wire 412, cocking solenoid 329, wire 413, solenoid 345 far removing stop 334 (Fig. 23) and thus rendering the stop 335 e~fect.ive, and the current continues via wires 414 (Fig. 11) and 151.
Member 311 (Fig. 23) is controlled b~ contact with surface 337 on stop 335, upon three units of carriage movement.
When wire 152 (Fig. 11) is efective, current passes via 148, switch 409, wire 412, cocking solenoid 329, wire 413, solenoid 345 IFig. 23) for removing stop 334 from effective position, wlre 414 (Fig. }1) solenoid 347 for removing stop 335 (Fig. 23) :~
and thus rendering the stop 321 effective, and th0 current continues via wire 152 (Fig. 11). Member 311 (Fig. 23) is .:
controlled by contact with surface 320 on stationary stop 321, ~, . . .
upon four units (.100") of carriage movement.
From the above, it is seen that carriage moving mechanism 149 is normally operable to moye ~he carriage forwardly, under control of normal character key circuits. .`
.
The mechanism is also operable reversely for automatic ~iffer-ential back-spacing (deleting) movement of the carriage.
., .
10. UPPER--LOWER CASE SWITCH MEANS

The upper-lower case snap switch means, on rod 415 ~ .
(Figs~ 28 and 31), is similar to bold-regular and print-no ~ ;
print switch means, which are mounted on rods 421 and 422 (Fig. 2), respectively, and which will be described later.
...
-84~

The commutator arrangement in the upper-lower case ~itch means is comprised generally of a rotatably shiftable disk 423 (F1g. 28) and stationary brushes engaging the disk, as shown. The disk is made or any suitable insulation material and it carries conduction contac~s that are engage-able with particular brushes. The unit formed generally of disk 423, member 428 ~Flg. 33) and member 430 is shiftable counterclockwise to the illustrated normal lower case position, and clockwise to the upper case position~
Referring to Chart A and Fig. 11, character groups "F", "C-" and "A" require two units (.050"), threa units (.075"3 and four units (.100") of carriage movement, respectively, in both lower and upper case. Therefore, the two unit, three unit and four unit wires 156 (Fig. 11), 157 and 158, for controlling the carriage moving mechanism as described, lead dlrectly to the "-F", "G'! and "A" group wires, respectively, without involving upper lower case switch means 159.
Since the characters in groups "B", "C", "~" and "E"
require a different amount of carriage movement in upper case than in ]ower case, their circuits mllst he controlled by the switch means lS9o Brushes 443 and 441 tFig. 28) are interconnected and rendered effective only when disk 423 is in lower case position,~ and brushes 445 and 441 are inter-connected and rendered effective only when the disk is in upper case position, all as indicated in Fig. 11. ~hen brushes 441 .. .- '' . . ' " .

~ S33~7~
and 443 are e~fec~ive, the key in "Group B" is operated, the carriage is controlled to move rour vnits by the circuit running through four unit wire 158, wire 448, effective brushes 443 and 441, "Group B" wire and the operated Xe~
switch. However, t~hen the machine is in upper case and disk 423 is shifted clock~ise to its upper case position operation of the key in "Group B" causes a two unit carriage movement by the circuit directed through two unit wire 156, wire 449, efective brushes 445 and 441, the "Group B" wire and the operated key switch. Brush~s 451 and 450 (Fig. 11) are effective when disk 423 is in the counterclockwise lower case position, and brushes 452 and 450 are effective when the disk is shifted clockwise to ltS upper case position. Considering brushes 453, 454, and 455 o~ insulator 434 (Fig. 28), brushes 454 and 453 (Fig. 11) are ef~ective when disk 423 is in -~ `
counterclockwise lower case position, and brushes 455 and 453 are effective when the disk is in cloc~ise upper case `r~, pOsitioll~ Finally, considering brushes 456, 457 and 458 on .
insulator a35 (Fig. 28), brushes 457 and 456 (Fig. 11) are effectlve when disk 423 is in counterclockwise lower cdse position, and brushes 458 and 456 are effective when disk 423 is in clockwise upper case positionO
~.en the ~achine is in lower case operatlon c~ -individual keys in groups "C", "D" and "E" complete circuits through the upper lower case switch means as follows: A key '''~.
- - '' ' ' .. . ... .. . ... ... .. . .. ..

~ 533~
in "Group C" will complete a circuit through three unit (.075") wire 157, wire 459, effective brushes 451 and 450, "Group C" wire, and wire ]15 and switch 113 for the letter "k" as shown here by way of example; a key in "Group D"
completes a circuit through two unit (.050") wire 156, wire 460, effective brushes 454 and 453, "Group D" wire and the key switch; a key in "Group E" completes a circuit through two unit (.050") wire 156, wire 461, effective brushes 457 and 456, "Group E" wire and the operated key switch. Thus, as can be determined from the above and by referring to Chart A (After the Figure Descriptions), all lower chse requirements are satisfied.
When the machine is in upPer case and disX 423 (Fig. 11) shifted clockwise to its upper case position, the circuits for groups "C", 'D" and "E" keys are as follows:
Operation of a "Group C" key completes a circuit through four .
unit (.100") wire 158, wire 462, effective brushes 452 and 450, "Group C" wire, wire 115, and switch 113 unaer the character key "K", a "Group D" key will complete a circuit thLough ~lree unit (.G75") ~-ire 157, wire 4~3, effec.ive brushes 455 and 453, "Group D" wire and the operated key switch; a "Group E" key will complete a circuit through four unit !. '-o"! wire 158, ~ire 46~ effective brush~s 458 and 456, "Group E" wire, and the operated key switch.
From the above and by referring to the Chart A, operation of any character key will cause proper carriage -87-, .. . .

. . . . . .

533~

movament under the determinative control of the Upper-Lo~er Case Switch Means, regardless of the predisposed upper-lower case condition of the machine.
, ~:, . . .
~':

11. CASE SWITCH SHIFTI~G A~ID EMCOI)ING MEAMS
':. ' . ~ :
The case shifting bail arrangement, comprised of parts 46-49 (Pig. 4), is situated for lower case and it is shiftable clockwise about the axis of rod 46 for upper case.
Upon operation of shit key 17 (Fig. 4), 18 or shift lock 22, bail arrangement 46-49 is rotated clockwise, and, lever 465 is also swung clockwise (Fig. 10) which moves stud 468 down-,. ~ , .
ward to rotate bellcrank 471 clockwise ~Fig. 32). At about -~
. .
t~e midpoint of operati~n of the shift key linXa~e, spring 473 snaps bellcrank 471 clockwise to close upper case switch 478, Similarly, when the machine is returned to lower case ;~

condition, lever 465 (Fig. 10) and bellcrank 471 (Fig. 32) :. :
return counterclockwise to close lower case switch 477.
1 "
Switches 477 and 478 are closed when the machine is in lower case, and upper case conditions, respectively. ; -;
..
~ rushes 480 and 481 (Fig. 28) are conductivel~
connected by contacts when disk .23 is in the counterclockwise lower case position, and brushes 479 and 481 are effective when the disk is in its upper case position.
When bellcrank 471 (Fig. 32) closes upper case .~
switch 478, an upper case shi~t circuit is complete from the . . , '.~, ', ' ' '' .

~.

. . . . .. . . . . - - - - - ~.i ~0~33'~
source and wire 485 (Fig. 35), efective brushes 481 and 480 and related contacts on disk 423, which i5 momer.tarily held in lower case position, wire 484, closed switch 478, and solenoid 467, wire 487 (Fig. 35), through solenoid 488 fox shifting the case snap switch means to upper case, wire 489, and to ground through solenoid 490 in a differential key lock mechanism for renderin~ an upper case key lock arrangement operable.
Assume no~ that the disk 423 is shifted to render brush 480 ~neffective and brushes 481 and 479 effective. When bellcrank 471 is returned to L-C position, switch 478 opens and switch 477 closes, completing the lower case circuit w~ich is: Leading from source "S" and wire 485, the current travels momentarily through effective brushes 481 and 479 while disk 423 is detained in upper case position, through wire 483, now closed siwtch 477, wire 491, solenoid 492 . .
for returning the case snap switch means to lower case, wire i ;~
493 and to ground through solenoid 494 in the differential ~ey lock mechanism for rendering a lower case key lock arrangement operable. This lower case shi t c rcuit is broXen as dis';
423-returns counterclockwise and brush 479 is rendered in- ~ i effective as a result of operation of solenoid 492.
- Solenoids 488 and 49~ effect case shifting of the disk 423. The unit formed of stud 503, merrJ~ers 428 and 430 (Fig. 33) and disk 423 (Fig. 28) is urged to stay in the .

. .

",: :
``'' , ' . --~ -- - - ' ' ~ ',. ~.

~C~S33t74 , counterclockwise lower case position. When stud 500 (Fig.
34) is swung counterclockwise, stud 503 is urged toward the right end of hole 504, and the unit formed of stud 503, members 428 and 430 (Fig~ 33) and disk 423 (FigO 28) is urged to stay in the clockwise upper case position. Upon shifting the machine to upper case, upon the closing of switch 478 (Fig. 35) and energization of solenoid 488 as explained, the solenoid pulls link 495 (Fig. 34) upward, rotating member 496 counterclockwise and away from stud 500 against the tension of spring 499. In this manner, member 496 and its lnsulator 512 are shifted ahead of the rest of the mechanism. When the axis of spring 502 is to the right ;~
of rod 415, stud 500 engages surface 508 on member 506 for stopping member 50L in its counterclockwise position. At this time, insulator 512 closes switch 514 and the advanced swing of member 496 is limited. As a result of closing switch 514, solenoid 488 is automatically deenergized.
."':
A time-delay detent 517 (Fig. 33) is provided, for preventing the immediate clockwise swing of stud 503 ~Fig. 34), for allowing the circuit through switch S1 sufficient time to perform its functions.
The case shift detent and code punching circuit will now be described. The timing and effectiveness of these c1rcu1ts is determined by switches 514 and 515 (Fig. 34), and two sets of brushes cooperating with disk 423. One set ~;

.

' : ,, ... .,. . . .. .. ,, , ~ ' .

il~S33~
of three brushes, 529, 530 and 531 (Fig. 28), are secured on an insulator 532. Brushes 530 and 531 are effective when disk 423 is in the counterclockwise lower case position, and brushes 529 and 531 are effective when disk 423 ls in its elockwise upper case position. The other set, brushes 533, 534, 535, and 536 are secured on an insulatox 537 When the disk 423 is detained in lower ease position, elosure of switeh 514 (Fig. 35) initiates the following eircuit.
Current from souree S and wire 137 passes through contacts under tape return key 138 to the delete key 140. Wire 139 i5 eonnee~ed with wire 538 (Fig~ 15) and contac~s 217 and 211.
Thus, the eircuit normally travels through wires 139 and 538, eontaet 211, bifureated blade 205, eontact 210 and wire 539 eonnected bet~een eontaet 210 and solenoid 527 (Fig. 35), which withdraws detent 517 permitting delayed shifting of disk 423. The circuit continues via wire 540, eonnected to switeh 514 which in its closed condition has its blade 541 engaged with its blades 542 and 543, thus parallel eircuits for punehing the upper ease code (channels 4 and 6) are ~r~ated. The ~-ehannel ccde circuit travels via blads 54~, ;
wire 544, effective brushes 530 and 531, wire 545 connected with the~4-ehannel puneh wire and the m~in punch mechanism 161 f~r punehing a 4-ehannel punch hole in the tape, Simultaneously, the 6-ehannel code circuit travels via blade 543, wire 546, effective brushes 533 and 534, wire 547 91 ' v , ' ;.,:

.;:

~ ~S~374 connected with the 6-channel punch wire and the main punch mechanism 161 for punching the 6-channel hole in the tape.
Thus, the main punches 161 are controlled to punch the upper case code 4, 6.
Since the travel of the main punches and the work load on the main punch solenoids is less than the travel of detent 517 and the work load on solenoid 527, the momentary detention of disk 423 in ~ower case position provides sufficient time for punching the case shift code. However, . .
when the case shift code is punched and solenoid 527 releases detent 517 from stud 503, disk 423 is shifted clockwise to upper case position. Continuity between brushes 530 and 531, and brushes 533 and 534 is broken for permitting restoration ,;, of the 4, 6 code punches and for permitting restoration of detent 517 against stud 503, now in upper case position.
This shift of disk 423 also breaks continuity between brushes -480 and 481 for deenerglzing the upper case shift circuit throuyh the now closed switch 478.
When disk 423 is detained in upper case position, when ~he m~chir.e is t'nPn returned tG lower case and solenoid 429 is operated as described, switch 515 closes which initiates the ~ollowing circuit. Current travels from source S and -~
wires 137, 139, 538 and 539, solenQld 527, wire 540 and wire 548 connected to a blade 549 of the swltch 515 engaged with blades 550 and 551, thus parallel circuits for punching the , .. .-- - - - -~L~S337~ ~
lower case code (channels ~ and 7)are created. The 4-channel code circuit travels via blade 550, wire 552, now effective brushes 529 and 531, wire 545, the 4-channel punch wire and the main punch mechanism lGl for punching the 4-channel punch hole in the tape. Simultaneously, the 7 channel code circuit travels via blade 551, wire 553, the now effective br~shes 535 and 536, wire 554 connected with the 7-channel punch wire and the main punch mechanism 161 for punching the 7-channel hole in the tape. Thus, the main punches 16l are controlled to encode the lower case code 4, 7. t When the lower case code has been punched and detent 511 is operated by solendoid 527 to release stud 503, ~-`
disk 423 is shifted counterclockwise to the lower case position which breaks the continuity between the brushes 529 and 531, ~-and 535 and 536 for permitting restoration of the 4, 7 code punches and detent 517 against stud 503, now in lower case position. This return of disk 423 also breaks the continuity between brushes 479 and 481 for deenergizing the lower case shift circuit through the now ciosed switch.

~: .
'~
,, ~.
-93- ~
',`"' ~-- : , . ' " :' .... . . - - - :

~ ~ .
12. MAIN P~CH ~.CXANISM, A~D COD~ P~CHING
D READIMG ASS~MBL~ FR~EWO~

The encoding and code reading mechanisms shown herein as exemplary are of a punched tape variety, ho~ever, ',;: :, magentic tape, cards, dots for optical reading and other forms of encoding and reading arrangements may be substituted.
However, the disclosed arrangement includes many novel features in the arrangement of text encoding, delete reading, justification encoding main-reading for reproduction purposes, and code media handling, as well as novel features involving mechanisln for punchin~ tape, reading the same and for tape ~ndling, that are here disclosed specifically.
The main punch mechanism 161 is one of a number of interconnected cooperating code punching, tape handling and code reading mechanisms included in a major sub assembly, preferably located on the extreme right side of the machine.
~ he main punch mechanism 161 (Fig. 11) is comprised o~ seven solenoids 565-1 through 565-7 secured on plate 568 (Fig. 37), associated levers 566-1 through 566-7, and pin t~e punches 567-1 through 567-7. The hyphenated suf i~es identify the related code channel of each of these parts.
The ratios between a solenoid and its punch and the travel of al' solenoids and punches are substantially the same in all cases. The arrangement of punches 567 (1-7) rods 570, 571, plates 556 and 557 (E'ig. 36) and link 572 (Fig. 37) is _94_ -.. . :. .

........ .. , ., ..... . . . . :, 10~;~3~1~

customary in usual pin type punches. The punches are guided in closely fitting holes t'herefor (fig. 36).
The control ~ape (code medium) 577 (Figs. 37 and 38) normally travels from left to right on a smooth plane "`
surface. Ths tape is guided against transverse rightward t movement, by vertical sur~aces 580 and 581 (Figsl 37, 38 and 3~) and leftward by surfaces 584 and 585 (Fig. 39).
Punch receiving die holes 598 (Fig. 38), extend through the lower half of the cover 579.
The "Code Channel Punch Wires" 1 - 7 (Fig. 11) are connected witn solenoids 565-1 thxough 565-7 (Fig. 37), respectively. ~hen a circuit is completed through any of these wires as explained, the respective solenoids 565 are operated, each pulling its respective link 569, rotating the '' ' connected lever 566 counterclockwise, elevating its link 572, ' ;
and pushing its punch 567 upward through the tape and depositing the blanked out waste in the die hole 598. '~
W~len an operated solenoid 565 (Fig. 37) is deener- ,' ' ;
gized, a spring 601, connected to its lever 566 returns the ' `` '' lQver 566 to rest against the top of stop rod 600 and lts ~' punc~ 567 is withdrawn from the hole.
.,: ., .
~ormally, when a code is punched by the main ' '-punche~ and the punches are withdrawn, the tape is automatic'-ally shifted rightwardly one station.
'Incorporation of the main punch mechanism in closely , ~, l~S33t~9L ,. , arranged stations in a unified assembly with a bac~ space code reader and related automatic back-spacing and deleting ~ -systems, with separate jus~ifying punches, and with a main reading device for controlling the justifying reproducing machine provides many novel advantages and novel fully auto-matic features.

13 PU~CH CONTROL KEY ARRANGE~ T

This arrangement 144 (Fig. 11) is comprised primarily of two major components, namely a punch key 602 (Figs. 3, 42, 43 and 44) and a punch control relay 603 (Figs. 45, 46 and 47). In the punch "on" condition of the ~`
arrangement, khe composing machine is prepared to code for operation of the reproducing machine, and, in punch "off"
condition of the arrangement, the composing machine is pre-pared to operate alone, similar to an ordinary typewriter, without encoding for operation of the reproducing mac~ine.
The struchre of the punch key 602 is shown ln Figs.
42 and 43. Key 602 is normally pivoted cloc~7ise to "on"
position as shown but may be manipulated counterclockwise to "o~f" position. The key may be automatically shifted to "on"
position in machine clearing operations..
A yieldable detent 609 (Figs. 42 and 43) is provided for holding the key 602 in either "on" or "off" position~ --96- ` `

~337~
In the illustrated position, roller 612 is urged into recess 613 on ~ey 602 ror holding the key in "on" position. When ~ t the key is manipulated counterclockwise, roller 612 lodges in a recess 615 on th~ key as shown in Fis. 43. Current flows through strip 620, conductor 618 and contact 621 when key 502 is "on", flows through strip 620, conductor 618 and contact 619 (Fig. 43) when the key is "off".
The structuxe of the p~nch control relay 603 is shown in Figs. 45, 46 and 47~ Upon operation of solenoid 642, link 641 is pulled downward, rotating lever 634 clockwise until it is stopped by stud 643 at the end of its operation.
During clockwise operation of lever 634, pawl 635 rotates wheel 632 one step, ratcheting detent 639 into the next notch on the wheel. Upon deenergization o solenoid 642, detent :'. ,:,, 639 holds wheel 632 and spring 637 returns lever 634 counter-clockwise, ratcheting pawl 635 out of one notch and into the succeeding notch loca~ed one step counterclockwise ~rom the ~
f~rst. ~ i In the illustrated normal punch l'on" position of wheel 632, one of its surfaces 654 holds roller 648, bail 644 and lnsulator 651 counterclockwise against the tension of blades "a", and blades "a" are held in engagement with blades ~ ;
"b" of the switches. t~hen the wheel 632 is rotated one step as explained, the blades "a" disengage from blades "b" and ;~ `
engage blades "c" as the blades "a" move the insulator 651 bail 644 and the roller 648 clockwise and the roller enters ':

- :

~1~53~37~

a notch ~55. When the wheel 632 is operated another step ciockwise, it cams the roller 648 countexclockwise, and therefore the bail 644, insulator 651 and the blades "a"
are also shifted counterclockwise to disengage the blades "a" from blades "c" and reengage them with the blades "b"
as shown. `~
The general circuitry and operation of the punch control key arrangement will now be described.
Assume that punch key 602 (Fig. 42) is in the clockwise "on" position, and that roller 648 (Fig. 47) is resting on one of the surfaces 654. The circuit through ~ ~-engaged conductor 620 (Fig. 48) and contact 621, and wire 658 is broken, under this condition, since switch 656 is shifted to engage blades "a" and "b", and to disengage blade "c". When key 602 (Fig. 48) is shifted to "of~" position, current will travel through wire 657, engaged blades "b"
and "a" in switch 656 to solenoid 642 for advancing wheel 632 (Fig. 473 one step after which roller 548 drops off surface 654 into notch 655 permittiny blade "a" to disengage irom biade "b'! and to engage with biade ;'c'. ~nen phase switch 656 (Fig. 48) is thus shifted, pawl 635 (Fig. 47) is engaged in the succeeding notch on wheel 632.
Tf ke~7 602 is then shifted to "on", since bl~des ',!.
"' "a" and "c" in phase switch 656 are now engaged, current wlll -travel through solenoid 6a2 for advancing the wheel 632, but ,.

3~
since solenoid 642 is now bein~ operated to shift the wheel and to cam roller 648 out of one of the notches 655 and since the circuit now on through blades "a" and "c" would be broken by the ca~ming action before the solenoid were fully operated, a ho-lding circuit comprised primarily of a common normally open switch relay 661 and a normally closed sw tch 662 is provided for assuring~ull operation of the s~lenoid 6~2.
' 14. FORWARD l~ PU~CH TAPE FEEDING .`~ ~
. . . _ --- ~:

The forward tape cycle control 169 and nearly ider.tical reverse tape cycle control are included in an assembly 672 (Figs. 1, 49 and 50) which is secured to the shelf member 9. Upon operation of solenoid 168 (Fig. 11), link 678 ~Fig. 52) is pulled downward and a latching surface 689 on pawl 684 engages with stud 682 as the pawl is shifted cloc~ise by spring 686. When the main punch circuit is broken and solenoid 168 is deenergized, switch 691 is closed.
Thus, normally, following operatlon of a key 16 ~Fig. 11), the main punch mechanism 161 and of solenoid 168, the circuit thro~gh the punches and solenoid 168 is broken as ~`-the key 16 begins its return stroke and as the operated punches are also returning, the solenoid 168 is returned and switch 691 (Fig~ 52) is automatically closed which causes ., ' ' ' ~,:
_99_ :
.. .

.. . .

the punched tape to be fed one step fo~ardly out of the main punches.
Upon closure of switch 691 (Fig. 54), current travels from source and wires l37 and 693 through blade 177, wire 694, switch 691, wire 695 and goes to ground through solenoid 696. Also, a normally open switch 697 is closed as solenoid 696 completes its operating stroke. Closure of switch 697 permits current to flow through solenoid 698 and to ground through the switch. Operation of solenoid 698 restores t~e forward tape cycle mechanism 169 to normal.
Upon operation o solenoid 698 (Figs. 50 and 52) lever 701 is rotated against spring 702 and its rightward end engages stud 705 and causes elevation of the surface 689 above stud 682 to permit return of the lever 685 by spring 686 which permits switch 691 to open and break the circuit through solenoid 696 (Fig. 54), thus the solenoid is permitted to be returned and switch 697 will open for deenergizing solenoid 698. WhereupGn, spring 702 (Fig. 52) restores lever 701 to :, . .
the po~ition shown. At this point, a main punch forward tape cycle is complete.
The structure of the main punch forward stepping tape feed mechanism will now be explained.
Upon cperatlon of solenoid 696 (Fig. 55), link 706 rotates bellcrank 707 against spring 709. Sequentially, during counterclock~ise operation of the bellcrank, pawl ,,~,.~, ..
--100_ ' .

~ 33~4 : ~

711 is shifted leftward and, aided by spring 713l the .. : .
hook portion 716 engages a tooth on ratchet 717 as the cam ;~
surface 714 is moved away ~rom stud 715, and the pawl rotates the ratchet cloc~wise one tooth whereupon a hook-like stop , ~ .
sur~ace 724 on the pawl engages the stud 715 fox limiting .~ :
the travel and preventing overrotation. One clockwise step ~ ::
o~ ratchet 717 causes on forward step of the control tape . ~::
577 (Fig. 38). Upon operation of solenoid 696, stud 725 .`
(Fig. 55) rotates lever 727 clocXwise, and the axis of spring 730 passes below the center of pivot 728 and thereafter, upon the increasing leverage attitude, the spring snaps the lever 729 counterclockwise against a limit stud 737.
Insulator 733 permits switch 735 to open and it close~ switch 697 for signaling completion of the forward step operation .
and deenergizing solenoid 696 ~Fig. 55). Then spring 709 ,":
returns bellcrank 707 clockwise against stud 710, where cam `
portion 714 on pawl 711 holds hook end portion 716 free of the ratchet 717, and stud 725 returns the snap switch arrangement ~.
to the position shown, the switch 735 is again closed and switch 697 is aga.in opened for deenergizing solenoid 6~
(Fig. 54). This mechanism is operated and returned to normal, . :
,i.
for each forward step o~ the control tape.
Sp.ockets 740 and 744 each have pin type teeth 745 (Fig. 40), and the number and angulation of the teeth prefer-ably correspond to that of the teeth on ratchet 717 (Fig. 55).

--101-- . , ' ' . , , ' ' `; ' 3'74 The teeth on the sprockets ~it into holes 746 (Fig~ 56), and feed the tape from one station to the next or hold the tape at positive stations in the p~nch mechanism.
Rotation of the sprockets 740 and 744 (Fig. 36), the ratchets 717 and 742 and the shaft 73~ is yieldably held in positions corresponding to step-by-step stations of the tape 577 (Fig. 38) by a yieldable detent means 747 (Fig~ 41), which cooperates with the sprocket 744. The detent means is comprised primarily of a ball 748, a spring retaining cup i49, an expansive spring 750 and a spring retaining screw 751. The ball and cup are assembled in a hole therefor in the punch assembly's hinged cover 579, and the bottom of the hole prevents the ball from dropping out o~ the cover, when the hinged cover is opened up. However, a milled arcuate slot 752 in the bottom of the cover permits the co~er to be closed while it also permits teeth 745 of sprocket 7A4 to coact with ball 748. An arcuate slot, like slot 752, is also provided for clearance of the teeth 745 on sprocket ?40 (Fig. 40). When shaft 739 is rotated, one of the tee-th 745 ;
(Fig. 41) on ~procket 74~ presses the ball 748 upward in tile hole against tension o~ the spring until the sprocket has moved half a step and then the ball is pressed down by the spring between the next pair of ~eeth, and this occurs for each step of the sprocket. Therefore, shaft 739 is yieldably held in angular positions of rotation corresponding to steps . . . ' -1~2-.. . . - - - .- -3 74 ~
of the tape.
When tape 577 (Fig. 38) is fed forwardly (right-wardly), by the main punch tape feed mechanism, the tape slides under the cover 579 and above the surface 578, and ~- :
the tape for the text of the line is accumulated in a loop 753. W~en the line is complete, the justifying information is punched in the tape ahead of the line accumulated in loop 7S3, so the jus~ifying information will be read first when the text ~or the line is read as the l~ne is typed by the r, ' reproducing machine as ~ill be explained more fully hereînafter. . . . :
When the control tape 577 is fed forwardly through the main punches and under hinged cover 579, it is drawn down over the machine's general cover 245 (Fig. 56) from a ..
tape supply spool 754, rotatably mounted on a spindle 755, and it flows generally leftwardly. The tape moves against : the roller of assembly 756 by a guide member 757 secured on - , . .
the cover. Another roller assembly 758 and guide member 759, .:.

like assembly 756 and member 757 respectively, are secured - on top of the cover 245 for directlng the tape in proper alignment or being drawn under the punch cover 579. .
. .
~,-.

-103~
~ :

-- .
' ,' ' ' ... .. .. . .. .~. . . -- - . i . , .

~L~5~33'~
15. SPACE KEYS AND THEIR CIRCUITS
. .

A word space bar 760 (Fig. 3), and two, three and four unit nut space keys 761, 762 and 763, respectively, are provided in a convenient arrangement across the front of ~e keyboard as shownO The space bar is used for normal word spacing, and the nut spaces are used in instances where the designated ~pace is desired and where it is desired that this `' ~:
~. .
space remain unaffected by justifying in the reproducing machine. '' ~' Upon depression of two unit nut space key 761 (Fig. 59), its conductor 779 operates relay 815 which ':
completes a circuit through "Group F" wire and a wire 820.
Current travelling through the "Group F" wire causes ~he carriage moving mechanism 149 (Fig. 11) to move the carriage two units, which is appropriate ~or key 761 (Fig. 59).
The code repre-senting the two unit nut space, is ~' 3, ~, 6. Each of the code~ fo~ the spacc keys in_ludes a channel code bit, and the circuit for this code blt in each '~
case is employed for preventing the occurrence o~ a space at the end of a justified line. However, operation of the two unlt relay 815, as explained, dire~ts the current from the "Group ~" wire and wire 820 thr~ugh wires 821, 822 and 823, which are connected to contacts in the xelay. Wire 821 is also connected to the 3 code char.nel punch ~ire, thus the , ' , ' -~
.. . . , :

... . ~. . . . . . . .. . . .
.....

~33 .
main punch mechanism 161 is normally caused to punch the 3 channel code bit. Wire 822 is also connected to the 6 code channel punch wire and the current therethrough causes .
the main punches to punch the 6 channel code bit. The wire 823 (for the 4 channel code bit) is connected between a contact in relay 815 and a commutator portion 824, which lS actually ~
incorporated with the commutator means ~46 (Fig.ll) in ~:
mechanism for measuring an amount le~t in a justifiable ~line.
~ormally the commutator portion 824 tFig. 59) directs the . : :
current from wire 823 through a wire 825, which leads to the i. .
4 ~ode chan~el punch wire fQr causing the main punches 161 to punch the 4 channel code bit. Thus, normalIy when the two .; ~ .
.~ . .
unit space key 761 is depressed and the relay 815 is operated aq explained, the carriage is caused to movP two units (.050") .
and the resul~ing circuit through "Group F" wire and wire :
820 is directed by the relay 815, through the wires 821 and B22 for punching the 3 and 6 code bits, and through wires 823 .

and 825. Summarizing further, deprassion of space key 761 normally cau-qes the carriage to be moved two units, and it ~ ::' .
causes its code 3, 4, 6 to be punched by the main punches 161~ as described. When the thre~ and four unit nut space keys or the word space bar is operated, appropriate carriage movement occurs in a manner similar to that for the two unit nut space operations described above. l~-~
When the carriage is moved appropriately, a space counting circult isnormally made effective by the relay 818(Fig.62) `::.
.,, ~'.

-10 5- , . ...
' ~

..

~)533~4 for counting the word space. Thus, for justifying purposes, a wire 840 is connected to a contact in the relay 818 (Fig. 62) and to a contact in the ~ustifying key commutator mechanism 142 and the circuit thus originated is normally used for word space counting. In justiying "on" conditi~n, the blade 843 (~ig. 17~ is in engagement with a contact 846 on insulator 271. Contact 846 is connected by a wire 847 (Fig. 62) to a blade 848 of a single pole~ double throw, selector switch 849 in a word space counter 850 to activate the counter.
Space counter 850, is constructed in this embodiment to count up to sixteen word spaces for justifying purposes, and it is constructed to count beyond sixteen word spaces in order to keep track of the actual number of such spac~s.
When there are fifteen or less word spa~es in a line, blade 848 is engaged with blade 851~ ~30wever, when a sixteenth word space is count~d, blade 848 is shifted into engagement with blade 852.
Wire 853 is connected to blade 851 and to solenoid 854, provided for counting the first ~ixteen word spaces.
Wire 855 is connected to blade 852 and to a solenoid 856, provided for counting greater than sixteen word spaces.
Wire 857 is connected to solenoids 854 and 856, and to blade b o~ switch 858, which is one of the switches 652 (Fig. 48) in punch control relay 603 (Fig. 45) previously described.
Blade a (Fig. 62) of switch 858 is grounded, and in punch ~on" condition, is engaged with th2 blade b but, in punch "off" condition, is disengaged from the blade b. ,~
Under certain conditions, when the justifying key - ln~ -~0~3 74 243 (Fig. 17) is "on", when the punch control key arrangement 144 (Fig. 48) is "on", and when the space bar 760 (E~ig. 62) and its relay 818 are operated as described, the space counting circuit is efrective and runs from relay 818, through wire 840, the ef~ective justifying key commutator i42 and through wire 847 leading to the word space counter 850. When the previously counted number of spaces is less than sixteen, the circuit trav~ls through the switch 849 and wire 853 for operating the solenoid 854 to count the space.
When the previously counted number of spaces is more than fifteen, the space countiny circuit travels throug'n the switch 849 and wire 855 for operating the solenoid 856 to count the space. However, if the justifying key 244 (Fig. 17) is shifted to "off" position and its switch means, including insulator 279, is shifted as explained, the space counting circuit is rendered ineffective.

'.
16. _ WORD SPACE COUN:I.'ER STRUCTURE

The word-space counter 850 (Figs. 2 and 18) is located between plates 237 and 238. Forward counting solenoids 854 and 856 (Fig. 62) are secured on a bottom plate 861 (~ig~ 18), which is secured to the plates 237 and 238.
Solenoid 854 (Fis. 65) counts the first sixteen word-spaces.
~ormally, p~wl 868 is held in counterclockwise-position, against spring 870, by a finger 871 on the pawl coacting with .

-~07-., ' ' '''-~.

. . . - - --iL~533~
with a stationary rod 872. Normally, as shown, center blade 848 (Fig. 63) is held in engagement with blade 851, for operation or the solenoid 85~ (Fig. 62) to count the occurrence of spaces.
Normally, detent 887 (Fig. 65) is engaged with ;;
wheel 875 for at times holding a previous count position of `~
the wheel.
Normally, upon each operation of the space bar 760 (Fig. 62), solenoid S54 is operaked to count the word spaces and its armature pulls link 862 (Fig. 65) downward, rotating members 863, 865 countercloc~wise. Whereupon finger 871 is moved away from rod 872 and spring 870 rotates pawl 86~ to ratchet over a tooth on wheel 875. At this point, the motivating means for counting a word space ( 1 - 16) is cocked for counting~ Thus, when the space bar 760 (Fig. 62) is released, and when the relay 818 and solenoid 854 are de- ;
energized, the ~pring 866 (Fig. 65) rotates the member 865, pawl 858, the engaged wheel 875, sleeve 876 and member 877 (Fig. 63) one step clockwise against tension of the return spring 878 ror counting the space. hear tne end or chis, detent 887 (Fig. 65) again falls into the holding position and finger 871 coacts with rod 872 for rotating pawl 868 clear of the teeth on wheel 8'5, 2S member 865 comes to rest against rod 867. This action may occur as many as sixteen times.
,~, -lG8-~ 5337~ :
At the end of a fi~teenth operation for any given line, a surface S91 (Fig. 63) on member 877 is brouyht clock-wise up to the stud 881, but the bellcrank 882 is not moved and the switch 849 is not shifted. Therefore, counting of a sixteenth word space may occur as described. However, when the solenoid 854 (Fig. 65) is deenergized for a sixteenth time, the cocked mechanism operates and the surface 891 (Fig. 63) shifts the stud 881 and bellcrank 882 counterclock-wise, against tension of a spring 884, for shiting the switch 849 at the same time that the member 8i7 is shifted into its sixteenth word spa~e representing position. When the switch 849 i~ thus shifted, as long as the line progresses forward, the solenoid 854 (Fig. 62) will not again be opexated ror counting spaces, and the member 877 (Fig. 63) will remain in its sixteenth position. As long as switch 849 (Fig. 62) is - .
shifted, the solenoid 856 is operated to count additional word spaces that may occur in excess of sixteen, as explained.
The mechanism in Fig. 61, for counting word spaces ., i .
in excess of sixteen is similar to that described for counting the first sixteen wor~ spaces shown in Fig. 65. Since the two mechanisms function in the same manner, energization of - solenoid 856 (Fig. 61) causes the ratchet wheel 898 to be .. ..
advan~ed clockwise one tooth, where it is held by detent 899 in a similar manner to that described above. However, the -~
accumulating arrangement in Fig. 61 merely has a larger , . . . ~ .
capacity and therafore is different structurally from that ', -109,- ' ~

.
- .. . ~ .. . .. -3'~4 previously described.
For illustrative purposes, the greatest column width is eight inches and the word space counter is constructed to count 160 word ~spaces.
In the illustrated form, the incremental spacing `~
of the teeth on wheel 898 (Fig. 61) and the ratio of gears 904 and 905 is such that for the total possible word space - counting operations from 17 to 160, inclusive, the ratchet wheel 898 is rotated s-lbstantially 4-1/4 revolutions while gear 905 is rotated approximately 19/20 of a revolu~ion.
A switch 911 (Figs. Gl and 62) is provided for controlling reverse word space counting, which occurs during ;~ .
deleting or back spacing, operations. Switch 911 is normally shi~ted as shown and the blades 912 and 913 are nonmal7y e~fectively engaged whenever the number of word spaces counted are sixteen or less. Further, when the number o~ word spaces ;
counted are seventeen or more, gear 905 is shifted one or more i~crements respectively counterclock~ise and the switch ~' 911 is shifted so that the blade 913 is inef~ective and blades 912 and 914 are effectively engaged.
Blade 913 (Fig. 62) of switch 911 is connected by a wire 929 to a reversing solenoid 930, which is provided for incLementally reversïng the mechanism shown in Figs. 65 and 63 whenever the word space counter stands at sixteen or less and a word space ls deleted during back spacing operations.

--1'10--.
.. . . .. . .

,. ;

When the word space counter has accumwlated seventeen or more word spaces, the switch 911 (Fig. 61) has been shifted ~or rendering blade 913 ineffective and for making blades 912, 914 e~fective. Th~ blade 914 is connected by a wire 937 (Fig. 62) to a second reversing solenoid 938, which is provided ~or incrementally reversing the 17 - 160 word space counting mechanism in Fig. 61, as may be required i`
during deleting operationsO
When a line is complete and encoding ~or justlfy-ing is complete, word space counter 850, is cleared by clearing solenoid 944 (Figs. 18 and 61).
In order to assure full restoration o~ both the 1 - 16 and the 17 - 160 mechanism, the clearing arrangement is held in clearing position until the machine i5 in proper condition for starting a new line and means in Fig. 61 for temporaxily holding the clear condition in the word space ;-counter is provided which comprises solenoid 960, lin~ 959, latch 955, and spring 958, for shifting the latch to ine~fe~t-ive position, whereupon spring 950 (~ig. 65) restores the -~i clearing means and permits spring 889 to restore detent 887 and permits spring 900 (Fig. 61) to restore detent 899 Thereafter, when solenoid 960 is deenergized, the spring 958 returns the latch counterclock-wise against the side or rod ~;
946, as shown, ready to latch when clearing occurs again.

`.~'" -' .

.. . . . .. .

,, ., , . ~. , . ,.. , , . .. . . , ~ :

~C~5~374 17 . _BAC~ S PAC ING AND DE LET ING

In this machine, backspacing or controlled right-w~rd traverse of the carriage is used only for deletion of subject matter (characters and spaces) previously set into the machine and recorded on the tape. Backspacing or deleting is done automatically as controlled by the punched tape for consecutivaly moving the carriage right war~ly in accordance with the last encoded bit on the tape, so that no variations will exist between the ~orward move-ment o~ the carriage and the backspace movement thereof.
During such operations, the tape is fed backwardly through a dalete reading device which controls the carriage to rnove reversely the amount that it was moved forwardly for any ;
character or space code read by the backspace reading device.
Since backspacing is controlled by the last code or consecutive !i,,'.' ', codes punched in the tape previously, there can be no error in what is deleted and the amount the carriage is moved reversely. Therefore, upon completion of backspacing or deleting, the carriage will be alignèd with the position it was in before the last deleted character was typed. .Also, as the tape is being fed reversely, delete punch holes are punched on top o~ the code being deleted, thereby rendering this code ineffective for controlling reproduction of this -~
deleted matter. The delete code punch holes are channels 4, 5, 6, and 7, and whenever any code including the holes ~ (3~7~
4, 5, 6, and 7, are rPad by the main reading device for controlling the reproducer, the main reading device merely causes cycling of the tape to bypass such deleted codes.
~henever a typist, operating the composing machine, realizes that she made a mistake, she need only depress the delete or backspace key which causes, as previously mentioned, the tape to be fed backwardly and deleted and the backspace reading device and the control mechanism operated thereby -causes the carriage to move backward accordingly as may be .
required for deletion o~ characters and spaces. Consecutive cycles of backspacing operations continue as lo~g as the backspace or delete key is held depressed by the operator, ., the key being automatically held depressed until each cycle .~, .
is complete. ' ;~

In addition to deleting characters and spaces, the ;, .
backspace reading device and the deleting process will also -eliminate functions such as shift to upper or lower case, .: .
to bold or regular and to print or no print. Also, during backspacing when the backspace reading device reads a shift ,~ .
~o lower case, t11e machine automaticaiiy shirts to upper case ~i so as to be in the position or condition it was in-before `~
the machine was first shifted to lower case, also the oppos1te taXes place when a shi~t-to upper case is read, the machine is automatically shifted into lower case. Accord-ingly, in much the same manner, when a bold and regular print ., . . , :

.' , ~''' :
, , . . . . .. .... .. . , . : .

~5;~
or no print code is read, the machine is conditioned oppositely to the code read and being deleted.
Backspacing to permit corrections, automatically deletes affected material codes, on occasions readjusts justifying data and appropriately steps the carriage reversely, and handles the tape automatically. Characters, spaces and functions are back spaced and deleted automatically in the composing machine without the operator's having to operate any corresponding character, space, or fu~ction keys, - ;
other than to depress the delete key 140 (Fig. 3).
Backspacing is a term used herein generally for characterizing reverse operations, such as back spacing the carriage, reversing the word space counter, and performing opposite functions from those previously encoded, as required to properly operate the composing machine during deleting operations. Deleting, in a-specific sense, refers to punching of a delete code (channels 4, 5, 6, 7) by the main punches -.n a station on the tape where a code had already been punched, and, thus, the previously encoded infor~tion may be in a sense eliminated, or more particulariy, the previously encoded material will be rendered ineffective and will be .
ignored when the deleted code is read during the reproducing `-opera' on~. In a general sens2, deleting may be consider~d as the entire process of back spacing and the rendering o~
corxesponding codes ineffective.

. , . ' :~

, ,., .. . . . .. , .. . .. , . .. , ~ , ... . . .... . . . . ..
. .. :

~0533~4 It should be recalled that the main punches 161 - (Fig. 11) are operated for encoding each normal forward operation of the machine, and thereafter in sequence the control tape is shifted forwardly one step by operation of solenoid 696, (Fig. 55) for shifting the punched code out of the main punches and ~or shifting clear, unpunched tape into ;
the main punch sta'cion of the punch assembly. Thus, normally, following each text and function series of forward operations, there is ~lear tape in the main punches~
When the delete key 140 (FigO 15) is depressed, a back space function code (Channels 5 and 7) is punched by the rnain punches, just before the series of deleting operations begin, as will be explained. The tape is then s~epped reversely one step for each succeeding code, to be ~-~
deleted, as will be explained. When the delete key is permitted '~
to restore, a deleted code remains in the main punches and the back space function code is situated reversely one or more steps out of the main punches, depending upor. the numer of deleting operations that have been performed as will he explained. From the abov2, i~ will b~ seen tha~ the deleted codes and the back space function code must be shifted for-wardly through the main punches, in order to provide clear r~-tape .lgain in the main punches, so forward encod~ng may again begin~ The tape return key 138 ~Fig. 14) is provided for returning the tape forwardly, following deleting ~ i ' .. . . ................ . : .
.. .

~(:3533'7~

operations, and the back space function code (5, 7) is automatically shifted one step forward of the main punches, as will be explain~d. Also, as will be explained, the back space function code causes the tape return key to be xeleased and the machine to be normalized upon full return o~ the tape.
When the delete key 140 (Fig. 15) is depressed, a number o~ swikches thexeunder are shifted, primarily for rendering normal ~orward operation circuits inef~ective and for rendering back spacing and deleting circuits efective.
Upon depression of the delete key 140, swltch blaaes 203, 204 and 205 are disengaged from respective contacts.
Thus, the forward carriage moving circuit, normally running ~hrough wire 141 and ~orward motion solenoid 329 (Fig. 11) ~ ;
is rendered ineffective. Likewise, the case shifting circuit, normally effective through the wire 539 (Fig. 15) and the case shift encoding means shown generally in Fig. 35, is rendered --ineffective. However, the case switch shifting means remains operable, by the circuits that run through wire 485, switches 477 and 478, and solenoids 488 and 492, for appropriately operatlng the case switch means and thereby controlling differential carriage movements during deleting operations as will be explained. ;
When the deleke key 140 (Fig. 15) is fully depressed and in latched position, as described, the switch blade 203 is engaged with contacts 212 and 213 for renderlng a reversing ~, . .

... .,. .. ., - . - .
: - ' . , ,;

circuit e~fective, and switch blade 205 is engaged with contacts 216 and 217 for rende ing a back space function and delete conditioning circui~ effective and also for rendering an automatic back space reader circuit available as required ~-during back spacing sequences, as will be explained When the delete key is depressed, its lever 201 acts on tab 961, rotating bellcrank 962 and its insulatox 964 clockt~ise against blade 965. This action breaks the continuity between blades 965 and 966 and, thus, eliminates any possibility of current passing through wire 165 and the forward tape feed controls 166 and 169 (E~ig. 11). t~en the lever 201 (Fig. 15) is latched in operated position, blade 965 is engaged with ~ ;
blade 967, which is connected to ground. Thus, forward feeding of the tape is avoided, while the main punches 161 ~Figs. 11 and 65) are still operable through wire 162, arrangement 144, wire 163 and the shifted switch 164, for punching the back space function code (Channels 5, 7) and the delete code ~channels 4, 5, 6, 7) in the sequence of operations.
A switch means 968 (Fig. 66~, operable upon depression o ~ ' he delete key 140 causes the punching o~ tne back-space function code and then, in sequence, for completing a back-space reader circuit.

.. . ..
Lever 971 (Fig. 1~) is rotated clock~ ise for an initial phase and, due Iargely to operation of solenoid 986, ,:c:
is automatically xeturned for the remaining phase of deleting .

.

.. ..
- . .. . .. . . . . . . ., . ,~ -~533~4 :
operations, when the delete key 140 is depressed.
The initial phase of deletlng operations will now `~
be described. When the delete key 140 is depressed and the contacts 982, 983 and 984 are engaged by conductor 976, a circuit causing punching of the back space function code (5, 7) by the main punches and for conditioning the machine fox back spacing and deleting operations is rendered ef~ective. The current travels via wire 137 (Fig. 66), through contacts undar the tape return key in normal position, through wires 139 and 538 (Fig. 15`, contacts 217, 216 and blade 205 now in operated position, and through wire 995, which is connected to contact 216 and to a blade "a" of a switch 996 (Fig. 66) in the group of switches 652 of the punch control relay 603 (Fig. 45). However, this initial delete circuit is effective only when the switch 996 (Fig.
66) is "on", and current passes through blades "a" and "b"
of the switch and switch 998, wh1ch determines if there is a supply of encoded tape in the back space reader. Swikch 998 is closed whenever work has been do~ , encoded and the ~ .
tape red accordingly forwardly thxough the main punches, for any glven line, Since deleting is possible and possibly necessary only after work, including a mistaXe, is done duriL~ composition of a line, switch 998 is nolT,ally closed when the delete key is utilized. Normally ihe initial delete circuit continues through switch 998 and a solenoid looo, .

-118- ~
.. . .

.. . .~ -. ~ ~

~5337~

which is provided for 1ocking the carriage moving mechanism 1~9 and thereby locking the carriage against manual return ;;
during deleting operations. The circult, which operates the solenoid 1000 continues via a switch 1002 among the switches 652 in the punch control relay, and to solenoid 1004. Solenoids 1004 and 1005 in a print-no print and a bold-regular switch means, and a solenoid 1006 in the upper-lower case switch means 159, respectively, are similar in s~ructure and function, and are operated simultaneousl~
501enoids 1004 and 1005 are interconnected and solenoids lQOS and 1006 likewise connected. Since the laver 971 is operated and conductor 976 is engaged with contacts 982 -q84 for the in~tial phase, the initial delete circuit passes - through solenoid 986, contact 982, contacts 983 a~d 98~.
Wire ~016 and 1017 are respectively connected to the contacts -983 and 984 and to the main punch mechanlsm 161 (Fig. 66), ;
specifically connected to the punch solenoids 565-5 (Fig. 37) and 565-7, ~espectively, for punching o~ the back space function cod~ (Channels 5 and 7). The initial phase circuit continues via the wire 162 (Figs. 11 and 66), switch 669, wire 163 and goes to ground through shifted switch 164 (Fig. 15). Thus, the initia~ delete circuit causes the `
punch mechanislll 161 (Figs. 11 an~ 60) to punch tl~e '~ack space runction code (5, 7), without shifting the tape, and solenoid g86 (Figs. 15 and 66) is operated to break the circuit and .

' ' ' , .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ... . .. . . . .. .... . . .

` ~ :

53~
to permit lever 971 (Fig. 15) to return counterclockwise to the position shown.
Switch 998 used for slack tape sensing means is shown in Figs. 45 and 670 The switch is held closed whenever operations for a presently being typed line are encoded.
Rod 1036 (Fig. 55) is located in the area where ~ ' the text fox a line may be accumulated in a loop 753 (Fig. 38) and it is situated above the plane 578 on casting 573 when~
ever coded tape for the text o~ a line is accumulated in a loop. Whenever a loop 753 is eliminated, whether by feeding of the tape 577 forwardly as when a line ls completed and a new line is not started or by feeding the tape 577 reversely as during deleting, the tape 577 is drawn down in a straight line on plane 578. When this occurs, the tape 577 moves the bail rod 1036 downward rotat~ing rod 1027 clockwise. Clockwise rotation of rod 1027 and bellcrank 1026 (Fig. 67), against tension of spring 1028, operates the snap switch arrangement for opening switch 998 and closing s~itch 1033.
The initial delete circuit normally continues ~rom swi~ch 998 (Fig. 66), through tne wire 999, to the solenoid 1000 for locking the carriage moving mechanism (Figs. 23 and 27) and the carriage against manual return during deleting operations with pawl 1046 engaged with ~heel However, since the carriage moving mechanism must -120_ -.

. . . , . . ... . . .. . . ., . , . ,~

l~S3~7~ `
operate reversely during deleting operations, the pawl 1046 is withdrawn momentarily in the sequence of back spacing operations, at the time ratchet wheel 303 is operated, solenoid 1058 (Fig. 23) is energized each time the mechanism . .
operates to move the carriage reversely. Opera-tion o~
solenoid 1068 pulls link 1067, rotating bellcrank 1062 (Fig. 27) and lever 1064 counterclockwise. Counterclockwise rotation o~ bellcrank 1062 swings stud 1066 up against ~he pawl 1046 for rotating the pawl o~t of engagement with wheel 303 (Fig. 23). At about the time pawl 1046 is rotated .
against rod 390 and clear of the wheel 303, a stud 106~ on -.
leve~ 1064 ls shifte~ leftward of a surface 1070 on a latch 1071. `` .
:. .
. ~atch 1071 is provided for holding the lever 1064, :
bellcxank 1062 and the pawl 1046 counterclockwise, so that the pawl is disengaged ~rom the wheel 303 only during each `
actual back space operation of the wheel. The latch 1071 ~
is operated to control reengagement of the pawl 1046 with .`
the wheel 303, in sequence, as soon as the wheel is operated rev6rsely .
- The initial phase delete circuit continues from the solenoid 1000 (Fi~. 66) and wire 1001, switch 1002, `-wixe lon~, and solenolds 1004-~006, The solenoids 1004 and 1005, in a print control switch means and a bold-regular :~
switch means, respectively, are similar in purpose and - . ., -~.
_i21-~ ~
.. . : ~ .'.

.. ... . .. . . ... .. . . .. .... .. . . . . .

~ 33'7~L ;
construction to the solenoid 1006, which will now be described and which conditions the Upper-Lower Case switch means for back spacing aperations.
The solenoid 1006 (Flg. 33) and the mechanism operated thereby is provided for rendering the time-delay detent 517 ineffective, during back spacing and deleting operations, so the Upper-Lower Case s~atch means will immediately respo~d to the Case Switch Shifting Means, since the time delay required in forward operations is not necessary in back spacing operations.
Upon operation of solenoid 1006 (Fig. 33) link 1072 is pulled leftward, rotating member 1074. Detent 517 is rotated to ineff~ctive position clear of pin 503 and the pin 1075 is engaged by latching surface 1083 on the hook 1077 ~or holding the detent in ineffective positlon during deleting operations.
When solenoid 9~6 (Fig. 15) is energized, it disengages pawl 970 from lever 201 as e~plained. Whereu~Gn, the spring 974 restores lever 971 counterclockwise to the position shown. At this time, conductor 976 disengages ~rom contacts 982-984 for breaking the 1nitial phase delete circuit, and the conductor 976 engages the contacts 980 and S91, as described, ~r rendering the back space reader circuit effective.

- - - - . .

' 1~33t7~ . , This reader circuit is now compiete from a source -(Fig. 66), through contacts under the tape return key 138 in the normal position, to contact 217 (Fig. 15) under the delete key 140, through switch blade 205 now in operated p~sition, contact 216, contact 980 in switch means 9~ , through the restored c~nductor 976, contact 981 and to each o seven code channel related operating solenoids 1088-1094 (FigO 66) in back space decoder 1095.
Solenolds 1088-1094 each correspond to a code channel. Each solenoid is connected with a respective sensing device in back space reader 1097 which controls the back space decode 1095 (Fig. 70-75) by operating only thDse solenoids 1088-1094 which correspond wi~h the code then ~ .
being sensed by the reader 1097, The current from the -'' ' operated s~lenoids~passes through the reader sensing devices and the significant punch holes in the tape, and it goes to ground via a switch 1099 (Fig. 66), which is one of the punch control relay switches 652. The reader circuit will remain on, until the back space decoder has operated and the control tape has been shi~ted reversely, removing the code from the sensing means.
~ pon energizatlon of solenoid 1088 (Figs. 70, 71 and 73~, corresponding to the first code channel, its a mature and insulator are retracted for disengaging blade a from blade b and for engaging blade a with a blade c of the -12~

...

1~53 ~
switch, whereafter the i~SV¦QTor 1106 is stopped in operated position by a stud 1109 secured on plate 1101.
Upon deenergization of the solenoid, the blade a returns the armature and insulator to normal position, and it dis-engages from blade c and reengages blade b. The mechanism described in this paragraph is operable in response to reading of code channel 1.
Selective operation o~ the solenoids 1088-1094 (Fig. 70) will cause the respective switches 1107, 1110, 1111, 1112, 1113, 1.114, and 1115 to be shifted, while any non-shifted switches xemain generally ef~ective in their normal condition.
The back space reader includes primarily seven wires. 1096 (Fig~ 38)~
When a code punch hole in the tape 577 is shifted one step beyond ~rightward of) the main punches as occurs in a normal forward cycle of operations, the curved upper end of the channel related sensing spring 1132 contacts the plate 1137 through the hole i~ the tape. Thus, normally when the back space sensing circui-t is rendered e~rective, the last punched code, which was automatically shifted one step out of the main punches and into the back space reader, will ~ontr~l the circuit to operate the appropriate one or more solenoids 1088-1094 (Fig~ 71), and it will txavel through :.
the effective wires 1096 (Fig. 38), throuyh the related .. ' " ~.
- ~`.
.. , . ... - - . - . - -.. - ~ .. ... ': . ~ '~
~ , ,,, ,, : ~:~ .

5~37~
sensing springs 1132 and the punch holesJ through the plate 1137, rivets 1141, and terminal plate 1139. The wire 1098 (Figs. 39 and 66) is connected to the back space reader terminal plate 1139 (Figs. 38 and 39) for continuin~ the back space reader circuit.
The back space decoder's control of reverse carriage movement, delete punching and reverse tape movements that are involved in deleting characters, and nut spaces that are not to be altered for justifying purposes, will now be descriked.
When a character or nut space code, requiring reverse carriage movement, is sensed by the back-space reader 1097 (Fig. 66) and the code related one or more solenoids 1088-I094 are operated as described, a circuit is completed through the back space decoder 1095. This circuit travels from a source through wire 137, the tape return key in normal position, the wire 139 (Fig. 15), the contact 212, ,:; . .
the blade 203 on ~he dele,e Xey 140 in operat~d position, through contact 213, a wire 1145 (Fig. 66), and normally . . - . ~
through commutator 142, a wire 1146, punch control relay 144, a wire 1147, co~nutator 146 and wires 1148 and 1149. Wire :.
1145 is connected to contact 213 (Fig. 15) and wire 1149 (Pig. 65) is connected to a st~itch 1150 in the carrlags moving mechanism 149~ The reversing circuit within the ``
carriage moving mechanism involves primarily the switch 1150, .
':
.

:~5337~ `
a wire 1151 between the switch and a solenoid 1152, and a wire 1153 between the solenoid and the wire 413 which is also employed in the normal forward circuit as explained~ :
The switch 1150 is normally closed, and it remains closed until the solenoid 1152 is ~ully operated to cock for reverse movement of the carriage.
Contlnuing with the backspace decoder controlled circuit, the current normally passes through wires 1145-1149, switch 1150, wire 1151, solenoid 1152, wire 1153, and the wire 413. At this point, the reverse circuit through wire 413 may travel one of three courses: namely, (1) throuyh the wire 150, relay 153, wire 156, the upper-lower case circuit changer 159 and one of the group wires A - G; -(2) through differential stop solenoid 345, wire 151, relay 154, wire 157, circuit changer 153 and one o~ the wires A - G;
or (3) through the differential stop solenoids 345 and 347, wire 152, relay 155, wire 158, circuit changer 159 and one of the wires A-G, for two, three ~r four unj.ts of ca~riage movement, respectively, as cantrolled by the circuit changer 159 and as determined by the back space decoder 1095.
The number of units that the carriage is reversed during back spacing operations are each the same as they were . during tlle previous forward operatiorlsO In order to facllitate following individual circuits through the back space decoding arrangment, the wires 1154 in Fig. 70 are given a .;
,.

-126- .

.. . . .

.: . , . . - - . , - ~ ~

~533~
letter prefix, whlch corresponds with the "Group" designation for each of the characters and spaces as shown in the "Chart A" that can be found following the Figure descrlptions hereinabGve. The only exception to this pertains to the "Space ~ar" (word space) circuit, which enters the decoder via a wire 1155. However, an effective circuit travels through the operated decoder and cohtinues via a wire 1156 ~Fig. 66) which is connected between the center pole of final stage switch 1107 (FigO 70), and two contacts, one in row "0" (Fig. 14) and one in row "N", under the tape retuxn key 138. Thus, the back space circuit travels through wire 1156, blade 178 in the illustrated normal posi- ;
t,on, and to another contact in row "~" and through a wire 1157 connected thereto as shown. The other end o~ wire 1157 is connected to a solenoid 1158 (Fig. 66) in a back space tape oycling mechanism 1159. The solenoid 1158 is grounded in a convenient manner as shown.
The structural details of the carriage moving mechanism's back spacing arrangement will now be described.
As explained previously, the reversing or back spacing circuit within the mechanism 149 (Fig. 66) involves the normally closed switch 1150 (Fig. 23), wire 1151 and solenoid 1152, as well as the dirferential stop controi mechanism also used in forward operationsO
Operation of the back space decoder 1095 (Fig. 6~), ;
.

. . ', ::
'~,' .

,. . ' .
- . ~ . . - . . , , - . . .

~i3;3~L
under control of the back space reader 1097 when a character or a space code on the control tape is sensed by the reader, causes a circuit through wire 1149, switch 1150, wire 1151, solenoid 1152, wire 1153, and the differential stop arrange-ment under control of the circuit chanyer 159 and th~ decocler to be rendered e~fective.
Operaiion of solenoid 1152 ~Fig. 23) shifts member 311 clockwise, while pawl 310 passes over two, three or four teeth on wheel 303 (FigO 77), in preparation for shiting the wheel 303 counterclockwise (reversely) and thus ~novirl~ the carriage rev~rsely two, three or four units, respectively, upon return of the member 311. The amount that member 311 is permitted to rotate clockwise during the cocking acticn is determined b~ the effective differential stop 334, 335 or surface 320 (Fig. 23), w.hich a.re controlled the same for these.back space operations as for the forward . operatlons described previously.
When solenoid 1152 (Fig. 23) is deenergi~ed, ~he heavy spring 1167 (Fig. 77) shifts the member 1166 and the I~tch~d member 3].7 countercloc~ise. The tab 319 on the member 317 contacts the member 311, and moves it and its -.
pawl 310 counterclockwise four, three or two units of movement, depe.nding on the di~erentially controlled cocked pos:ition ..
of member 311, back to normaI position. This return movement . .
of the pawl 310 drives the w'neel 303 and the carriage geared ~.
,: .

-128- ~`
. - . :~ .
. . ....
- "

~ 53374 thereto reversely a corresponding number of units. Thus, it is seen that the carriage is moved reversely a number of units corresponding to that associated with the character or space code sensed by the back space reader 1097 (Fig. 66)~
As described, the circuit through switch 1150 (Fig. 23), cocking solenoid 1152 and the differential stop solenoids 345 and 347(~Fig. 66) when required) is broken, ~ollowing the cocking action, to cause deenergization o sol-enoid 1152 and thus to permit the spring 1167 tFig. 77) to take effect and drive member 311 counterclockwise for causing the back spacing operation. By referring to Flg. ~6, lt can also be seen that breaking of the circuit deenergizes solenoid 3a5, or 345 and 3~7, as the case may ~e fox restoration o~ the differential stops. As explained in connection with forward operations of the machine, the pawl 355 tFiY~ 10) is operated by the stud 357 on stop 334, whenever the stop or the stops 334 and 335 are operated; to release stud 354 and permit spring 353 to swing bail 350 uncler the , ~ -operated stop or stops for holding them in operated position.
~his occurs also in back spacing o~erations.
When the operator permits the delete key to restore, when the key is automatically released near the end of a final cycle of deleting operations and when the cycling ceases as will be explained, the carriage moving mechanis~
remains in condition for back spacing; the pawl 1181 (Fig. 77) ,-_ _ . ., . . . . , .~ , ` - -~ L~5;~3'~
remains engaged with stud 1191, the member 393 (Fig. 23) is held in ineffective posl~ion and the pawl 1046 remains in effective position for preventing manual return of the carriage, all under control o f pawl 1050 and tab 1051 in latching position. At this point, if the operator finds that further deleting operations are desirable r he may depress the delete key again for initiating further back spacing and deleting operations as before, but he can not return the carriage for starting a new line beeause the pawl 1046 remains ef~ective~ This feature is provided because the control tape is not yet returned and the machine is not conditioned to resume normal forward operations. on the other hand, if the operator finds that sufficient back spacing and deleting is accomplished, he may depress the tape return key for causing return o~ deleted codes through the main punches and for restoring the carriage movi~g mechanism to normal condition. For p rforming the latter operation, the ~
solenoid 1060 is operated during a tape return cycle of ~-operations, as will be described later. ~Iowever, it will be ~ -, , :
seen that upon operation of the solenoid, it pulls link 1059 for rotating pawl 1050, its member 1052 and the tab 1051 to release the bail 1042 and the finger 1049 of member 1040.
r~her~upon, the spring 1061 ~Fig. 27) returns members lG4 and 1045 and the bail 1042 counterclockwise for rendering the pawllO~ ineffective. At the same time, as tab 1051 moves .',~

- ' . :
, , .. . ... . , ... ~ . . ... ....... ... , . .. , , ..... . ~

~ 337~
out from under finger 1049, the spring 1190 returns member 1189 countercIockwise, lin~ 1188 rightward, member loao back against rod 390 and it pulls the link 1039 upward to the illustrated position. Upward movement of link 1039 and its stud 1171 (Fig. 76) rotates the members 1172 and 1178 counterclockwise ~or pressing the stud 1180 against the pawl 1181 and releasing the pawl from stud 1191 (Fig~ 77).
Whereupon, the member 317 is restored clockwise, by spring 318 (Fign 24), to normal position where tab 319 (Fig~ 23) is stopped ag?inst the surface 320 as shown. When this occurs the carriage moving mech~nism is said to be in normal co~dition. The reverse tape cycling mechanism shown particu-larly in Fig. 78 is ve~y similar to the ~orward tape cycling mechanism shown in Figs. 51 and 52 and described previously and therefore will not be described in detail.
Since the solenoid 1158 ~Fig. 66) is in the decoder -circuit with the back space decoder 1095 as described, the ~-solenoid 1158 is operated each time the ~ecoder is operated for deleting purposes. Energization of solenoid 1158 pulls link 1194 (Fig. 78) for rotating bsllcrank 1195 clockwise against tension of relatively strong spring 1196. Thus, -....
the back space type cycling mechanism i5 cocked to operate.
W~en the dele~e circuit is broken, as when the switch 1150 (Fig. 66) in mechanism 149 is opened to deenergize solenoid 1152 and to thus initiate the reverse carriage `' '.

: - - .
.... ~, . . ` ;.

~ S33''~ ~
movement as explained, the solenoid 1158 is likewise deenergized to permit operation o~ the back space tape cycling mechanism. When solenold 1158 is deener~i~ed, the s ring 1196 (Fig. 78) rotates bellcrank 1195 counter-clockwise and stud 1200 pushes engaged pawl 1201 left~ ard, against tension of relatively light spring 1203, ~or rotating me~er 1202 counterclockwise and for closing switch 1206~
Closure of switch 1206 causes the control tape to be shifted reversely one step through the back space reader, so ttle next code may be read by the reader in the event the delete key is held down through another cycle and so the previous code (the code controlling the current cycle) is returned into the main punches where it will be deleted (punched to include the delete code, channels 4, 5, 5, 7 in the remaining part of the current cycle.
The circuits for automatically releasing the delet~ key, and for reversely stepping the control tape through the back space reader and the main punches will now be de;,cribed. A wire 1218 ~Figs. 80 and 81~ is connect.ed ~ ;
to a source oE power and to interconnected contacts 1219 and `;
... ..
1220. A wire 1221 is connected to a contact 1222 and to the ~.
solenoid 225. A wire ~223 is -onnected ketween solenoid 225 and the switch 1206. Contacts 1219 and 1222 are normally .

.~

?53374 engaged by blade 1224 ~or conductin~ current therebetween.
However, when a line has progressed into the justifying area and a space is the last bit of text encoded, the blade 1224 is shifted off contacts 1219 and 1222 for avoiding solenoid 225 and for there~ore enforcing another successive sequence o~ deleting operations in order to eliminate a space or an underllne mar~ at the end of the line in the justi~ying area. When the.blade 1224 is shifted off contacts 1219 and 1222, it is shifted on to contacts 1220 and 1225 ~or making current available from the power source, wire 1218 contacts 1220. and 1225 and the engaged blade, and a wire 1226 connected between contact 12~5 and wire 1223.
Normally, however, closure of switch 1206 (Fi~. 80) completes a circuit that runs ~rom source of power through the wixes 1218 and 1221, through the solenoid 225 for . :
releasing the dele~e key as explained, through wire 1223, ..
through now closed switch 1206, through a wire 1227 connected :~
between switch 1206 and a solenoid 1228, and the current operates solenoid 1228 for shifting the tape ona.step i~
~eversely, and goes to ground as indicaced.
. Operation of the solenoid 225 (Fig. 15) unlatches the.pawl 220 from pin 222 for permitting counterclockwise restor~tion of the lever 201 and delete key 140 under te~.sion of spring 202. ~ :
, .':'' .

. -133-.. - .. .- - - - . - . - - - :

~53374 Reverse operation o~ the control tape by solenoid 1228 (Fig~ 80) will now be described.
Solenoid 696 (Fig. 55) is operated to rotate the shaft 739 clockwise and to shirt the control tape 577 (Fig. 3~) rightward one step for each fo~iard operation of the machine. Thus, it holds that the sha~t 7~9 must be merely rotated counterclockwise to shift the tap~ 577 left-ward one step for each dslete operation. Sha~t 739 (FigO
67~ is rotated cbunterclockwise step by step. When solenoid 1228 is energlzed as explained, link 1238, ri~et 1240 and bellcrank 1239 are operated against tension of spring 1242, while spring 1246 pulls pawl 1243 and causes the lever 1241 to follow clockwise in engagement with rivet 1240. As pawl 1243 begins to move, its surface 1247 permlts the spring 1246 to rotate the pawl clockwise into engagement with the ;~
wheel 742. Thereafter, the pawl rotates the wheel and shaft 739 one step counterclockwise. At the time the shaft is ;
rotated one step, a hooked stop sur~ace 1248 on pawl 1243 engages the stud 1237 for limiting the action of the pawl ar~d prcventiny overrota~ion of the wheel 742 and of the . .' sha~t 739. At this point the code on the tape 577 (Fig. 38) - s,, that ~as read by the sensing springs 1132 earlier in the back spacing cycle of operations is returned ir. ~ligr~ment with main punches 567. Also at about this time, the insulator . .
- 1244 (Fig. 67) engages a delete switch 1249, which is --1~ .
- .,-,, ~l~S~3'~ `

secured on plate 557 tFig. 45~ in a known manner. Afterthe tape is back spaced on step as ~ust explained, the solenoid 1228 operates a bit urther and spring 1246 (Fig. 67) is stxetched while insulator 1244 closes the switch 1249, whereupon the stud 1235 limits clockwise rotation of bellcrank 1239. Closure of switch ~249 causes the delete code (channels 4, 5, 6, 7) to be punched along with the code now in the main punches 567 (Fi~. 38), and it causes the solenoid 1211 (Fig~ 78) t~ be operated for breaking the back space tape cycling circuit through switch 1206.
Opening of switch 1206 deenergizes the solenoids 225 and 1228 (Fig. 80~. Deenergization of solenoid 225 (Fig.15) permits the spring 223 to shift the pawl 220 counterclockwise against the stud 222 as shown, or to rotate the p wl to shi~t the surface 224 over the stud 222, depending upon whether the operator permitted the key 140 to restore at or before th~ solenoid was energized as explained, or he held the key depressed to be latched for an ensuing deleti~g operation, respectivelyO Deenergization of solenoid 12~8 ~Fig. 67) permi..s the spring 124~ to restore bellcrank 1239, rivet 1240 and lever 1241 counterclockwise, until the lever is stopped as shown against stud 1236. At this point the ~echanism is in normal position, and the surface 1247 is on stu~ 1237 for holding pawl 1243 clear of wheel 742, as shown, so the wheel, sha~t 739 and the control tape may be stepped . -135-S33~
2.) Divid~ng and Encoding Plates in each Group a. Odd and Even Direction Contact Nibs situated on the plates for coding the quotient and remainders. :
. . : .
b. COde Bar Contact Nibs .
II. Justi~ying Units Space Amount selected and : :
motivated Slide Means 1.) 2 paralleI Slide Plates in each of 23 positions a. parallel Cam Angle Slots in each slide .. :
plate~
III. Dividing Group ~electing Means, word space ` . :
controIled - ;
1.) Connecting Means (hooks) for connecting .~
.
each selected Group to the motivating means a. Motivating Circult Switch Means , :`
2.j Group Selec~ing Solenoids . ,~
IV. Dividing Group Motivating Means 1.) 1 Odd Number and 1 Even Nu~ber operating solenoid a.. Motivati~g Bail Means b. centra1izer or th~ ~ail Means V. Stationary Code Channel Bars.
, ~"
- -172~
, ~

.. . . . . .

.. :~.- .. .
~.
- . -- - . ....... .. :

33~
The ~ord space selected dividing means is comprised of eight groups of dividing and coding plate assemblies, designated as 1930 and 1931 in Figs. 120 and 122.
Each of the assemb'ies 1930 and 1931 is comprised of seven or eight dividing and encoding plates 1933 (Fig. 120), the exact number of which depends ~pon the codes for the involved dividend representing group. The coding configura-tion of the plates will be explained later. The plates 1933 ;
are shown in Fig. 120 and in cross-section in Fig. 123 and are assem~led in spaced vertical slots insulating members 1934 (Fig. 120); Each insu~ator 1934 has a tenon 1935 on both its forward and rearward ends which support (Fig.122) the insulator member with its plates 1933 (Fig. 120) on a pair of parallel support members 1937. A shouldered stud 1938 (Fig. 121) extending between support members 1937 (Fig. 123) maintains the members in their proper spaced relation. The assembly formed of parts 1933, 1934, 1937, 1938 and 1939 (Fig. 122) is secured together so as to be movable longitudinally together as a unit, and so as to be situated in any one of three positions. From Figs. i22 and 127, each of the groups may be moved from the illustrated normal c~ntral ta a leftward and a rightward position, and, they may be moved leftwardly from central pO5 ition for repre-senting one value and may be moved rightward from the central `~

., ~ .
~

~ \
- ~533~4 :

~reely by other means.
As bellcrank 12~9 restores, as just explained, ~ -its insulator 1244 permits the delete switch 1249 to open ;
for brea~ing the circuit therethrough. Brea]~ing this circuit deeneryizes the solenoid 1211 (Fig. 80) in the mechanism 1159 and deenergizes the delete punch solenoids in the main punch - ~;
mechanism 161. Deenergization of solenoid 1211 (Fig. 78) permits spring 1209 to restore lever 1208 ayainst rod 703 and clear of the stud 1204~ Deenergization o~ the delete p~nch solenoids, 565-4 ~Fig. 37), 565 5, 565-6 and 565-7, permits their respective springs 601 to restore the operated punches 567 (4-7) down through the control tape to normal ;
pOSitiOll.
At this point, providing ~he operator permitted -the delete key 140 (Figs~ 15 and 80) to restore when the `~
solenoid-225 was operated to automatically release the key and when the solenoid 1228 (Figs. 80 and 67) was operated to shift the tape as described, all automatic bacX space ~ . .
cycling would cease. A new cycle o~ deleting operations will ' n~t begin, under this condition, primarily ~ecause return of the delete key lever 201 (Fig. 15) and its switch blade 205 has broken the circuit between wires 538 and 995, 1086, a~d consequently the ~acX space decoder 1095 (Fig. 66) and the back space reader 1097 are rendered inoperable before the succeeding code is delivered into the readerO However, . .
. .

... . ... ..... . - - - - -~ )53~
if the operator held the delete key 140 in operated position at the time the solenoid 225 (Fig. 80) was operated to release the key, a succeeding deleting cycle would be~in as soon as the reverse tape feed solenoid 1228 operates sufficiently to deliver the next code into the back space reader. If this occurs, deenergization o~ solenoid 225 in cycle permits relatching o~ the delete key in operated posi-tion, as explained, ~or a succeeding cycle o~ operations, and the ba~k space reader circuit remains effective through the wires S38 (Fig. 66) 1086, 1087, decoder solenoids 1088-1094, the back space reader 1097, etc. for initiating a back spacing and deleting cycle of operations, as described previously. Thus, it is seen that one back spacing and deleting cycle or a plurality of such succeeding cycles of operations may be performed at the discretion of the operatox.
When a series of successive delete cycles of operations are performed, the initial circuit which causes punching of the back spaca fu1lction code (5, 7) as explained is closed only once, following depression o~ the delete key and prior to the first cycle of reading and deleting as described~ The following cycles of reading and deleting are per~ormed successively, as described, without involving the initial circult. However, if the dele~e key 140 tFiy. 1J) is permitted to restore following deleting operations as explained, the pawl 970 will latcn on to s.ud 969 as shown, -. , ' ,'. ' ' ~

~ l~5~37~
and, i~ the delete key is then depressed again, deleting operations including the ini~ial circuit ~ould be initiated as described. In this case, the back space function code (5, 7) r punched as a result of the initial circuit, will be punched with a deleted code standing in the main punches, instead of the back space ~unction code ~eing punched in a clear tape as be~ore. However, the deleted code standing in the main punches includes the delete code (4, 5, 6, 7) and the punching o~ the back space function code (5, 7) therewith is of no consequence. ``
Bac}c spacing and deleting o~ word spaces will now be described. When the word space code (channels 3, 4) is read by the back space reader, the operations are the same as for any two unit character or the two unit nut space as described, except that one must normally be deducted from the amount accumulated in the space counter~
N rmalIy, when the back space reader 1097 (Fig. 66) senses a code (in this instance, the word space code 3, 4), , the back space decoder solenoids (particular~y, solenoid 0~0 and lC91 (Fiy. 70))are eneryized, in Ihe manner herein-be~ore explained, ~ox comple~ing a particular circuit for -~
back spacing and deleting the word space. This circuit leads from a source thrcugh th^ tape return key in no ~..al posiilon, the delete key in operated position, and normally -~ihro~igh wires 1145 ~Fig. 66), I146, 1147, 1148 and 1149, ;-138-' . ~''.
,. . : .. . . .... ... . ... . ........

r~ -~

~hrough the carriage moving mechanism 149 for shifting the carriage reversely two units, through the wlxe 150, and the circuit changer 159. The circuit continues from -the circuit changer and the two unit group "F" wire, via a wire 1252. connected between the group "F" wire and the .
switch 911 (Fig. 62) in the word space counter 850. When the number of word spaces counted is less than 17, the circuit continues via blades 912 and 913, wire 929 and soleroid 930 for deducting one in the space counter as descri~ed. When the number of spaces counted is more than 16, the circuit travels through the blades 912 and 914, the 1' wire 937 and solenoid 938 for similarly deducting one in the space counter. Thus, it is seen that one is deducted in the space counter 850, regardless of the amount previously accumulated. The circuit continues from either the solenoid ~-;, 930 or the solenoid 938 via a wire 1253, connected to both . ~
of the solenoids and to a contact 1254 (Fig. 17) in the .
justifying on-off s.witch means 142. :~
When the justifying contr~l key 2~4 (Flg. 17) is in "of'; position and word spaces are not counted during forward operations as described, there-is no deduction in the space counter.850 (Fig. 62) during deletlng operations.
Th~ abo-va bacX.spaclng and deleting descriptio particularly covers a deleting of the character and space - - .

.... .. . .

~ ~5~37~ ` ~
cocles, but it will also serve generally to describe l:he deleting of other codes.
', . 18. CONTROL-TAPE RETU~N

In the preferred form, the tape return key 138 (~ig. 14) is manually operated, following deleting operations ~hen.the operator decides he has deleted a sufficient amount, to cause return of the deleted codes and the back space function code now on the control tape 577 (Fig. 38) . forwardly (rightwardly) through the main punches 567, so clear tape will again be available for further forward .~.
encoding operations, and in order to otherwise restore the machine to normal after deleting operations.
Key locking means are provided for preventing .-.
operation of any other key at the time the delete key is in operated position, and means are provided for preventing operai.ion of any key,- e~cept the delete key or the t3pe return key, immediately following restoration of the delete ~ .
key. .
- When the tape return key 138 (Fig. 14) is operated clockwise, ltS blade 176 ~s disengaged from contacts :~
198 and 200, as explained, for rendering all normal forward `i and reverse circuits leading from the source and wires 137 and 139 ineffective. Likewise, operation of blade 177 ,'.:
--14 0-- ~ .
,,, ~ ., .. . ' , '.,' - :, \
S;~37;~L
renders the circuit through wire 69~i and switch 691 (Fig. 54) inefrec~tive for causing normal forward step by step operation of the control tape, and it renders the circuit through wire 694, solenoid 698, wire 699 and switch 697 inefective for sequential operation of the for~ard tape cycling mechanism as described. Slmilarly, operation of the blade 178 (Fig. 14) renders ineffective the portion of the decoder circuit that normally runs through wire 1157 and the solenoid 1158 (Fig~ 66) in the back space tape cycling mechanism 1159.
Operation of the tape return key provides a circuit for returning deleted tape forwardly through the main punches, primarily utilizing switch 1261 (Figs. 54 and 80) which is closed only when deleting has just been performed and the back space tape cycling mechanism 1159 has been operatedO Detent 1266 (Fig. 78~ holds member 1198 in operated position for hol~ing the switch 1261 closed after a single or the flrst back s~?acing operation. 501enoid 1269 is operated, during tape return operations, to release switch 1261.
However, from the above, it can be seen that the tape shifting circuit through the operated tape return key 138 (i'i~ 54), closed switch 1'61, alternately closed and opened switch 735 and solenoid 696, will remain effective, generally speaking until switch 1261 is openedO When -141, - :. -: . - .-,, :~

~ 337~

solenoid 696 operates to shift the tape forwardly one step, the switch 735 is openedj by the action of the snap switch mechanism pivoted generally on stud 728 (Fig. 55) as described. Opening of switch 735 breaks the circuit through ;
solenoid 696, whereupon the snap switch mechanisl~ again closes ~he switch 735 as explained. In ~his manner, by :
repeated operations of solenoid-696, the deleted codes on the control tape 577 (Fig~ 38) are.returned step by step orwardly through the main punches 567 and the back space sensing means 1132, and, finally in this manner, the back space function code is shifted forwardly into the back space sensing means. . ;;~
As the deleted codes are returned through the back space sensing means, the back space decoder solenoids :.
are operated in response thereto in the same manner as before :~
described. However, since the forward and reverse circuits are rendered ineffective by op ration of the tape raturn . ::
key as aescribed and still further since the delete circuits .. ~
in the back space decoder are not. connected for causing any .~: .
operations, reading o~ each deleted code and the resulting : :
operation of the decoder is of no consequence. Following return of the deleted code or codes/ the back space function .
code (chann~ls 5, 7) is returned throu~h the maln punchGs and into the back space reader 1097 (Fig. 66~, whereupon the decoder 1095 is operated to cause the back space function, .~.

.
. -142-.. . . . .. ... . . , , , ~

~5337~ ~
which func~ion is to terminate tape return operations andto normalize the machine. The solenoid 1060 (Fig. 23) i5 operated to restore the carriage moving mechanism to t'ne illus..rated normal for~ard operation condition, to render the manual carriage return prsventing pawl 1046 ineffective, to restore the member 393 and to release pawl 1181 ~rom member 317.
De~ent 517 (~igO 33) was rendered inefective by operation of solenoid 1006 in the initial delete circuit.
As ~escri.bed previously, the solenoid 1082 in the upper-lower casa switch means 15g (Fig. 80) is operated to restore the detent 517 (Fig. 33) to effective normal position. In this manner, the upper-lower case switch means is normalized by the back space function circuit, following deleting operations at the end of tape return operatLons~

19 DELETIN~ TAPE RETURN A~ID DELETED CODES

It is unders~andable that an operator may, on occasion, delete and return the tape; and then find that another error, in the previously encoded work closer to the beginnlng of the line, should also have been deleted.
In a situation like this, the operator need only depress the delete key again, and hold it down until the first back space function code is deleted, until the prev-iously deleted codes are again run through the process and until the further .
-1~3- . ;

- ,'~ ' ,. ~

`~5~3~

deletions are accomplished in the same manner as before.
However, since the deletlon of the back space function code and the previously deleted codes require no correspondiny reverse ~ondi~ioning of the machine, their circuits leading to the back space decoder 1095 are shown in Fig. 66.
From the above, it can be seen that restoration o the delete ~ey 140 (Fig. 80) breaks the circuit between wires 1294 and 1272, and no current will pass through the decode`r 1095 as a result of decoding the delete code during tape xeturn operations. Thus, during tape retuxn operations, the back space ~unction code circuit, th~ ugh wires 1293, 1285, etc., is the only circuit that passes through the decoder 1095, and this circuit is for restoring the machine and terminating tape return operations. - ;~
' 20. DELETING CASE-SHIET CODES -~

As described hereinhefore, normal opera~ion o a shift key causes an upper case code ~4, 6) to be punched in the control tape; this not only indicates that the ' ;
machine is shifted to upper case condition at this time but lt also indicates that the machine was in lower case ~-condition prior to this operation. As also described, return of the shift key causes a lower case code (4, 7) to be punched, and this indicates that the machine was in upper case condition prior to this operation~ The machine ~
,. -.

3~4 is automaticall~ opera~ed to assume just the opposite condition whenever either of these codes is read during deleting operations, since the control tape is then fed reversely thro~gh the back space reader. To this end, when a lower case code (4, 7) is read by the back space reader 1097 (Fig. 66), means for shifting the machine to upper case condition is automatically operated, under control of the decoder 1095. Similarly, when an upper case code ~4, 6) is read, means or shifting the machine to lower case condition is automatically operatedO
Re~erring to Figs. 4, 5, 12, 70 and 82, upon operation of the back space decoder according to the upper case code, current flows from a source and normally closed switch 1213 (Fig. 82), wire 1295, solenoid 1296, wire 1307 and the solenoid 1308 for pulling li~k 1311 (Fig. 4) upward and rotating member 64 (Fig. 6) counterclockwise to disengage the latching surface 77 from pin 68 and to thus permit the typewriter to restore to lower case position1 At tnis same time, solenoid 494 (Fig. 35) operates to condition key loc~s for lower case conditi.on.

21. CARRIAGE RETURM

The conventional carriage return lever 111 (Fig. ;~ r 1 and 3) is pivoted on a vertical stud 1312, which is secured in carriage frame 80. Platen 90 is rotated 1, 2 or 3 .

, .. . , . . ~ . .

increments (line sp~4S ) ~orw~rdlY ~ depending upon the preset position of the normal line-space control button 112 (Figs. 1 and 3).
~ hen the carriage is manually shifted rightwardly (returned) one or more units (.025") or more), in the normal manner mentioned above, a switch 1315 (Fig. 23) is closed for normally causing the carriage return code (1, 2, 3, 7) to be punched in the control tape by the main punches ~ ;
in a sèries o~ automatic operations and for locking the keyboa~d keys against further manual operations.
Normally, and referring to Figs. 23, 79 and 83, upon return of the carriage and closing of switch 1315, the :~ .
solenoid 1337, in the general key lock mechanism 1335, and the solenoid 1343, in the end of line tape control 166, are immediately energized for operating their respective mechanlsms.
The general key lock mechanism 1335 is shown in Figs. 84 and 85.
Upon returning the carriage any amount over one ùnit, and upon energization of solenoid 1337, the solenoid pulls link 1346 and thus rotates the interposer counter-clockwise to operated position against tension of return spring 1350. At about the time the interposer 1347 ~~eac~es its operated position, the keyboard keys are locked against operation and the switch 1361 is effectively closed, the . -- .

. . , ... ~ .
- -- ., .

:.
.. . .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. .. . ...

3~
detent 13~9 shifts counterclockwise under tension of spring 1350 to latch stud 1348 and interposer 1347 in operated position. As the detent 1349 shifts in its latching motion, the lever 1352 rotates countercloc~.~wise therewith. ~ere~
upon, thè insulator-1356 on the lever shifts the blade 1357 out of engayement with blade 1358 and into engagement with blade 1359. Thus, when the s~lenoid 1337 is ully operated, the part of the carriage return circuit that passed through wire 1336 (Fig~ 83), solenoid 1337 and wire 1338 is br~ken at blade 1358, and the circuit through wire 1332 and blade 1357 is shifted to blade 1359 for justifying purposes.
Upon return of the carriage and-energization of solenoid 1343 (Fig. 83), the solenoid pulls link 1370 (Fig. 88) rotating the unit 1371-1373 clockwise a~ainst the tension of spring 1374~ At about the time the switch 1382 .
is-shifted and switch 1386 is closed, the pawl 1393 latches on to stud 1392, under tension of spring 1396, and the unit 1371-1373 is then stopped by en~agement of surface 1377 with .. .
rod 1375. At this point, switch l382 being shi~ted, switch 1386 being elo9e~ and the pawl 1393 being iatched on stud 1392, the end of line tape feed control 166 (Fig. 83) is cocked for further automatic cycling control. -The carria~e return code (1, _, 3, 7) is punched by the main punches 161 resulting from closure of switch 1386 as seen in Figs. 83 and 89.

~..... .

- - , :

~)5~37 ..
Referring to Fig. 83 en~rgized solenoid 1421 operates an end of line tape feed !nechanism 1422, the structure of ~^jhlch is sho~7n in Fig. 91. This m~chanism operat~d the sprocket wheels 740 and 744 (Fiy. 36), -to feed the control ~ape ~o~ardly through the main punches the equivalent of twelve steps in the exemplary embodimenk, in one motion which is sufficient to permit entry of the just punched carriage retuxn code into the main reader and which provides su~ficient uncoded space on the tape to permit parting of the tape between lines without danger of ;~
destroying the codes for either a previous or succeeding line. At the conclusion of this end of line tape feed `
operation, a switch 1423 (Fiy. 91~ is closed.
A clearing solenoid 1441 (fig. 51) is provided ~ ;
for restoring the switches 1330 and 1439 to normal open condition when justifying encoding for a line ls complete.
The structure of the end of line tape feed mechanism 1422, including solenoid 1421 and switch 1423 is shown in Fig. 83. - ;
Referring to E~igs, 36 and 91, counterclockwise rotaticn OL the segment 1447 rotates the $ear 1465 clockwise for accordingly rotating the shaft 739, and the sprockets - i 740, 7-~4 (~is. 35) to advance the control tape 577 (Figf 38 through the main punches 567 sufficiently for the just punched carriage return code to be permitted to enter the ~-' ~ 337~
main reader which is located at station ~. However, prior to f~eding o~ this amount o~ tape through the justifying punches as will be described, the tape ~ed through the main punches is accumulated in loop 753. At any xate, it can be understood tha~ the tap~ fed through the main punches ~ollowing carriage return is fed sufficiently for the last code to reach the main reader for controlling the reproducing machine, so the reproducing machine can complete its work reyardless of whether or not the composing machine is operated ful-ther for encoding succeeding lines.
When switch 1423 ~Fig. 83) is permitted to open, the solenoid 1424 is deenergized to permit restoration of member 1427 (Fig. 88), away from stud 1398 and against return stop 1429 under tension of spring 1428. Thus, restoration of the end of line tape control is complete.

, 22. SECONDA~Y l:INE TT; RMI~ATING CIRCUIT

The secondary line terminating circuits may be ta~en to include all of the justifying encoding and restoring circ~its that may operate automatically upon return of the carriage.
The secondary line terminating circuit to be described now will only be effective when the line has not progress2d i~to the justifying area near the right margin or .' ' ~.
' -14g~
', ' , ' ~ . .

-~5~374 ~ ~ :
when no word spaces have been counted; which situations are common, for example, when a parayraph is concluded midway in a line, or a~er the first word in a llne, respec~ively.
-The instant circuit is shown in Fig. 92.
Solenoids 944 and 1010 are operated to clear thespace coun~er or the mechanism 1483, respectively, when the line has not extended into the justi~ying area or there has been nb spaces counted, respectively.
When there are no spaces counted at the time switch 1334 (Fig. 92) is shi~ted, there will be no justl~ying and the circui~ will include a space counter zero circuit that will parallel the above described zero circllit, where it passes through the mechanism i483. A wire 1498 is connected between the wire 1482 and a zero contact 1499 -(Fig7 64), which is secure~ on the commutator contact . .
insulator 880 in the space counter. A matching contact 1500, on the insulator 880, is nor~ally conductively connected with the contact 1499 by a blade 1501 (Fig. 63), which is i~
supported by an insulator 1502 secured to the blade 1501 and to the member 877. Thus, in normal zero xepresenting position of member 877, the brush 1501 is engaged only with the con~acts 1499 and 1500 (Fig. 92) ~or conducting current therebetween. A wire 1503 is connected to the contact 1500 and to the wire 1484~ Thus, when no word spaces are counted : , ' , -150~
.
.. ' - . ' ' .' " .

., .. . .... .. . , ... ... .. ,. .. . . . . ,;. .

.
and the secondary line terminating circuit occurs, t~e circuit is complete between wires 1482 and 1484, via wire 1~98, contact 1499, brush 1501 (Fig. 63), contact 1500 (Fig. 64) and wire 1503 (Fig. 92), regardless of the condition of ~he mechanism 1483.

23. LEFT MARGI~ADJUST~NT

An adjustable left margin means (Figs. 3~ 95 and 97) is provided for arresting the rightward traverse o~ the carriage in any preselected one of a plurality of xeturned positions, and an adjustable right margin means is provided for dif~erentially locking the text composing keys to prevent their characters or space~ from overrunning the rlght margin. The margin means are manually adjustable to different lateral positions for providing various column pOSitiolls and widths. The various positions of the margin ;
means are arranged to always provide a column wiclth that is evenly divisible by .025", which is one unit as descri~ed.
In normal forward operation of the machine, when the carriage is moved leftward, finger 88 (Fig. 99) is moved away from surface 1518 (Fig. 95) and the bellcrank 1508 is permitted to restore, while th~ spring I530 (Fig. 98) returns the levers 1525 and 1529 clockwise to the positions shown. During thls restoring action, the bail 1524 (Fig. 95) - ' ' ., . .

~ 33~

and bellcrank 1508 are not only restored, as shown, but the bellcrank 1533 (Fig. 98) is restored as shown for permitting the compound switch 1538 to open. From the above, it can be seen that the full carriage return switch 1538 is closed only when the carriage is fully returned to the left margin stop 1504 (Fig. 3). Switc~ 1538 (Fig. 98) is closed for causing restoration of certain mechanisms after return of the carriage.

,

24. ADJUSTABLE RIGHT HAND MARGI~ MEANS_ The right hand margin means in the composing machine is manually presettable for determining the right hand margin of the lines and thus the columnO
The right hand margin means is presetta~le to indicate the margîn, thexeupon to be operated by the carriage to correspondingly actuate the amount left in the line ~ .:
mechanism for registering the amount that is left in the justifying area for justifying encoding purposes, for con-trolling the differential key locks and, for rendering effective the space at end prevented mechanism, when the line extends near the right margin of the column and justify-ing encloding is to be effected.
A rod 1542 (Fig.99), is secured to the left and right sides of the typewriter frame 15 (Figs. 100 and 95, respectively). A main adjustment means block 1543 (Figs.
99, lOo and 101) is cupported on the sleeve 1510 so as to i3374 be slidably adjustable therealong parallel to the path of carriage movement A detent 15`it-6 (FigO 102) is pivotally mounted on block 1543 and it is adapted to en~age notches 1547, in ths forward face of stationary rod 1542, for Iraintaining particular adjustment of the block and thus the right margin means.
In the normal position of the parts as shown, an upstan~ing pin 1562 (Fig. 103), ~ixed on pawl 1558 to the right of pivot 1559, lies in front of the end of det~nt 1546 as shown in Fig. 102. A depending pin 1S63 (Fig. 101), fixed on a forwardly and leftwardly extending arm of pawl 1558, servies to connect a spring 1564 with the pawl. The rightward end o~ the spring is anchored to the block 1543 as by depending stud 15650 The effect of the spring 1564 is to urge the pawl 1558 and the plate 1553 rightward to normal position and to urge pawl 1558 (Fig. 103) counterclockwise into engagement with slide mem~er 1561. When the operator manipulates lever 1550 (Fig. 102) to pivot detent 1546 cour.terclockwisa fol disengaging the detent ~rom a natch 1547 in preparation ~or moving the right margin means, the end of the detent acts on the pin 1562 9 (Fig. 103) for pivoting the pa~Tl I558 clockwise out of engagement with slide meIT~Pr 1561, against the tension of s~ring 1564 (Fig. 101) so that .

., - . .

... ... . , . . . ~ .. ~ ~ . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .
., . . : . , ~ !

~ i3374 the right margin mea~s may be moved to another selected position without affecting the slide mem:ber 1561. Upon ~ .
release of the lever 1550 by the operator, the sprin~ 1549 (Fig. 102) returns the detent 1546 clockwise aIld the spring 1564 (Fig. iOl) returns the pawl 1558 countercloc]~wise.
Upon release of lever 1550, the operator should exert slight leftward pressure on the finger tak 1551 (Fig. ~9) to ~;
assure that the right margin means is properly in the desired position where its detent 1546 (Fig. 102) is solidly lodged in the respective notch 1547., From the above, it can be seen that the mo~rement of the carriage and the carriage borne i~inger 88 (Fig. 9~), acting against lug 1556, is transmitted to the lug, the `r plate 1553 (Fig. 101), the pawl 1558 and the slide mem~er 1561, whenever the carriage is within .700" of the absolute end o~ the line. In this manner, the fillal position o:E the carriage, ir~ respect to the en~ c f the lire; i~ re~istered ' `' by the final position of the slide member 1561. ::
The slide member 1561 is assembled through clearance holes 1566 (Figs. 1 and 104) in the left and right sides of the main typewritFr frame lS, and it is slidably supported .: -in identical bearing plates 1567 secured on both sides ^f the frame. EaFh plate 1567 is accurately positioned as by two pilot pins 15689 fixed in the frame and extending through - . ' "':

....

.

-~ ;
~ 3374 locating holes thereore in the plate, and each plate is fixed to the frame as by screws 1569, for example.
The rightward end of the transverse slide member 1561 (Fig. 104) extends well b~yond the txpewriter frame and it is equipped with means for connecting th~ slide means to t-he amount left in the line mechanism.

,.

25. AMOUNT LEFT IN LINE MEC~ISM

As explained above, slide member 1561 is moved transversely le~twardly with the carriage, whenever the carriage moves within .700" of thç right margin, which is determined by the preselected position of the right margin means. Thus the slide member 156,1 is usually moved left-wardly to a position corresponding to the final posi~ion of the carriage, where the slide member is detained momentarily when the carriage is returned. The motion is transmitted into the Amount Left In the Line Mechanlsm b~ the linkage and motivating gearing shown primarily in Figs. 104 and 105.
Once the adjustment nut and bolt arrangement 1576 (Fig. 105) is set to properly lock the segment 1575 to the levar 1574, segment 15i5 is moved to correspond to the position of the carriage, whene~er the carriage is within .700" of the right margin. To this end, when the carriage movès to less than .700" of the right margin, the member -155~

,' ' ., ' ' ' ' -~, ~Q~i33~
1561 (Fig. 104) is shifted leftwardly accordingly moving rack 1570 leftwardly and rotating the segments 1572, sleeve 1573 (Fig. 105)` and segment 1575 counterclockwise, each from normal .700" representing position to a position representing the position of the carriage~ The segment 1575 has a larger radius than segment 1572 ~Fig~ 104) so that the per unit movement of segment 1575 (Fig. 105) is significantly larger than the .025" per unit movement of the carriage and the identical movement o~ the seyment 1572 ~Fig. 104) at its ptich line. This makes it possible for the mechanism, operated by the segment 1575 (Fig. 105), to distinguish between ad]acent operated positions of the seg-ment and the right margin means operated directly by the carriagel When the carriage is returned and the slide member -1561 (Fig. 104) is permitted to be returned, and when return of ratchet wheel 1578 (Fig~ 105) occurs, spring 1581 (Fig.
106) returns gear 1577 (Fig. 105) counterclockwise and the segment 1575, lever 1574, sleeve 1573, segment 1572 (Fig. 104) , clockwise aild tnus r0turn slide mem~0r 1561 righcward to normal rest position. The forward end of spring 1581 (Fig.
18) is anchored in the contact support plate 271 (Fig. 17)~ `
A return stud 1583 ~Fig. 18 and 105), for cor:troll-ng the return position of the just described mechanism, is fixed on the rearward face of wheel 1578. The unit formed of arm , -156- ~

. .

... .. , . . .. .... . .. . . , ... .. ~

~ i33'~¢
1584 (Fig. 107), sleeve 1585 and member 1586 is normally pressed counterclockwise by stud 1583 to normal return position, where a lower portion of member 1586 is sto~ped against a return stop 1587 which determines the normal at rest position of ths entire rotatable portion of the amount left in the line measuring mechanism.
When wheel 1578 (Fig. 105) is rotated clockwise, ~rom normal .700" representing rest position, stud 1583 is st~ung clockwise and unti 1584 - 1586 (Fig. 107) is rotated accordingly clockwise from normal rest position under tension of spring 1588. As the carriage moves closer to the end of the line, the member 1586 turns clockwise only until it reaches .G25" representin~ position, at which time the lower extension of member 1586 comes to rest against station-ary sp~cer 1589. At times when the carriage is moved closer to the end of the line, the stud 1583 merely moves farther clockwise and away from the arm 1584, and the member 1586 remains at its .525" represe~ting position. When the stud 1583 is again returned counterclockwise as explained, the stud ~turr.s the rl-.echanislll counterciockwise to the normal position, where the depending extension of member 1586 is stopped by stud 1587 as shown.
The contacf sup~ort plate 271 (Pig. 17), previously mentioned in connection with the justlfying on-ofr key, the .

-157- _ ~

. . -- .

.. . ., . . ... . _ .. .. . . . .. . . . . . ... . . . . . .

~ 3~
plate 1590 (Fig. 108j, plate 1591 (Fig. 109) and plate 1592 ~Fig. 110), and the.commutator contact insulator 880 ~Fig. 64) are all secured in the machine, respectively, from ~ront to back shown clearly in Fig~ 18. ~hese plates 271, 1590, 15~1, 1592 and 880 are supported on three hoxizon-tal ro~s 1593, 1594 and lS95 (Fig. 17), which are secured in holes therefore in the plates and in the ~rame plate 236 (Fig. 18) and frame plate 237.
The contact support plate 1592 and its switch blade support member 1586, which are part of commutator portion 824 (Fig. 59), is the first controlling arrangement to become e~fective in the amount left in the line measuring mechanism, when the carriage approaches the right hand margin. The commutator portion 824 is provided ~r controlling a means~for preventing termination o~ a justifiable line when a word space, nut space or an underline mark is the .
l.ast thing encoded in a line.
. The arrangement o~ brushes and contacts fo;- con- :
trolling forward direction operations of a pin carrier in a space or unde lina at the ~nd of a lina preventing ~.echan's~
will be explained. Interconnected contacts 1603, 1604, 1605 and 1606 (Fig. 110) on the plate 1592 are situated to be .
engaged by a brush 1607 (Fig~ 107) secured to insulator 1601, when the lever 1586 is in its .700", .675", .650" and .625"

. -158-- ' ' ' ' ,' . ' ' ' ' `~

.. .. . ... . . . . . . . .. . . .. ..
.. . .- ' ,..... , . - . . , . ., ~ . :

~L~)5;3~3~
positions, respec~ively, indicated in Fig. llOo Brush 1607 (Fig. 101) is connec'ced ~o a brush 1608 which is secured to insulator 1599 and i'c extends 'co normall~ be engaged ~ith a contact 1610 (Fig. 110), on plate 1592, when lever 1586 (Fig. 107) is in its normal .700" at-rest positionr Upon clockwise operation of member 1586, brush 1608 disensages from contact 1610 (Fig. 110) and it successi~ely engages interconnected contacts 1611, 1612 and 1613 as the lever 1583 (Fig. 107) and the carriaye, as explained, assumes the .675", .550" and .625" positions, respectively.
This arxangement o~ contacts and brushes 1603-1613 (Figs. 110 and 107) is provided ~or conducting current for performing forward operations of a pin carrier wheel, and for rendering operable forward step-by-step operations of the space or under line at the end of a line prev~nting mechanism only after the line has progressed to less than .700" from the rigni margin.
The arrangement of brushes and contacts for controlling reverse, or delete, opera'cions irl the space Ol-underline preventing mechanism will now be described.
Interconnected contacts 1614, 1615, 1616 and 1617 (Fig. 110) on pl2' e 1592, brush 1618 (~ig. 107) and brush 1619 on insulator 1599! and a wire 1620, interconnecting the two '"', ~ :
-159- ~ ~

~.:

brushes; and contact 1621 (Fig. 110) and interconnected contacts 1622, 1623, and 1624, on plate 1592 in posil:ions corresponding to .700", .675", .650" and .625", respectively, for the reversing circuits, are arranged similarly to those Eor forwarding circuits that were just described above.
The reversing circuits are not effective during forward operations, but the become ef~ective upon depression of the delete key 140 ~Fig. 11) for automatic bac~ spacing ope rations.
The commutator portion 824 (Fig. 59), involving the space keys, the underline key and their four channel -code bits as mentioned previo~sly; is shown schematically here, and its details are included in Figs. 107 and 110.
The commutator 824 (Fig. 59) prevents t~ie occurrence of a space or an underline mark at the end of a justified lineO
The wire 835, leading from the relay 817~ is ~oined by the underline key wire 136 (E~ig. 11), and the wire 835 is then also connected to interconrlected contacts 1625, 1626, 1627 and 1628 (Fig. 110) mounted on insulating suppcrt plate 1592.
i~orrnally, a~i d~3scri~e~:l, men~er 1586 (Fig. 10 / ) i;, situated as shown. A bifurcated brush 1629 is secured on insulator 1601 and, in normal position of me~er 1586, the brush 1629 is in engagemen~ wi~h contac~ 1628 (Fig. 110 and also with a contact 1630 on plate 1592. Contact 1630 is connected by the wire 836 (Fig. 59) leading to th~ four '' .

~ . . .. . . ... .. . . ~ . . . . . . , . ... . , . ... , ~. ~ . .. .. .. ... .

3'~
channel code punch wi~e and the four channel main punch solenoid as described. Thus, normall~, when the ~our unit space key or the underline key is utilized, its circuit passes through wire 835 (Fig. 110), contact 1628, bl~sh 1629 (Fig. 107), conLact 1630 (Fig. 110) and through wire 836 to the four channel main punch solenoid for punching the four channel code bit and for completing the code ~or the four unti space or the underline key, as the case may be~
However, when the carriage stands at less than O7P0" (.675"
or less) a~d a ~our unit space ~ey is operated, the carriage will be advanced to within the justifying area (~ess than ~600") and the circuit is altered to record the occurrence OI tnis space. The four channel circuit is also altered in the same manner to record the occurrence of an underline mark, which extends .100" and will sxtend into the justifying area under this condition, even though the carriage is not moved following the printing and encoding for the underline.
Bifu cated brush 1639 (Fig. 107~ is engaged with contacts 1638 and 1640 (Fig. 110), respectively, under the normal condition when the carrlage has not moved closer than .700" from the right margin and the member 1586 (~ig. 107) is in rormal position against stop 1587. As the carriage moves ~loser to the end of the line and member 1586 is r,LOVed ;
clockwise accordingly, the brush 1639 engages contacts 1637 `.' '~

- ~ .

', . . , ~

~ ;i33~4 and 1641 (Fig. 110) at ~he .675" posi~ion, it engages contacts 1636 and 1642 at the .650" position, and it engages and remains engaged with contac~s 1635 and 1643 a~ .625" position and, as the carriage m~es even closer to the right margin and me~bex 1586 (Fig~ 107) is stopped against spacer 1589.
l~en the line has not progxessed beyond .700" or .675" Exom the right margin, as indicated in Fig. 110, and a three uni~ space is operated, the circuit through the operated key will pass by wire 830 to the interconnected contacts 1635 1638 and, in this instance, the current will travel through contacts 1638 or 1637, the brushes 1639 (Fig.
107), the contact 1640 or 1641 (~ig. 110), and the wire 831 and the circuit leading to the four channel code punch solenoid as shown in Fig. 59. However, when the line has progressed to .650" or .625" and cl~oser to the right margin, when a t~ree unlt ($075ll) space would extend the l.ir~e into the justifying area (within .600" of the right margin) and when the three unit space key is operated, the four channel code bit circuit from the three unit space key wire 830 (Fig. 110) leads to contacts 1636 and 1635, and passes through the bi-furcat~d brush 1639 (Fig. 107), the contacts-1642 or 16a3 (Fig.- 110), and via wire 1644, which joins wire 1634 (Fig. 59) .
and the circuit for re~ording the sp~ce or und-e rline in the .

. . _ .

... . . . .. . . ; . . ... . , .. .. . . . ., . . . . .. . . . . , , ~ .. ... ...... ..
-~ 5337~
space at end o~ the line preventing mechanism as described for the four uni:t space above.
The t~o unit t.050") space key arrangement is much the same, except that the circuit for recording khe space in the space at end preventing mechanism does not become effective until the line has progressed to at least .625" from the right margin.
- In the abo~e manner, the space recording means is controlled by the amount lèft in the line mechanism co~nutator portion 824 (Fig. 59), to record the occurrence o~ a space whenever such a space will extend into the justifying area.

Amount_Left In the Line Co~mutator In the illustrated normal position of lever 1580 (Fig. 106), which position corresponds to .700" from the right margin as explained, the brush 1661 is engaged with a contact 1664 (Fig. ~108) on plate 1590. As the line extends to points closer than .700" of the right margin, the lever 1580 (Fig. 106) is snifted ciockwise and tne brush 1661 ;
engages contacts 1665 (Fig. 108), 1666, 1667 and 1668 as the line extends to .675", .650", .625" and .600" from the r,ght m.2rgin, respec~ ively. Since, at th.ese extents, the line has not yet extended to within the justifying area ''~

.:
-16~t-', ~ .

.. ... . . . . . .
, ~ 0533~ `
(within .600" of the right margin as explained), justifica-tion of the line will not take place and the contacts 1664 - 1668 are interconnected so that a common circuit therethrough will remain as what may be considered normal in these positions of the brushes. Similarly, when the line is completely filled out and there is no need to alter the extent of the line in oxder to justify, the circuit is again returned to normal where the brush 1661 (Fig. 106) is engaged with a contact 1669 (F1g. 108) in the "full line"
position on the plate 1590. The full line contact 1669 is also interconnected with the contacts 1664 - 1668 so that the nonnal circuit will also be effective when the line is perfectly filled out. However, when the line exterlds a lesser extent into the justifying area, the brush 1661 (Fig. 106) will be shifted to engage individual contacts 1670, 1671, 1672, .... 1690, 1691 and 1692 as the line extends to .575", .550", .525", . . ; .075", .050" and .025", respect-ively, from the right margin. These individual contacts 1670 - 1692 are selectively engageable by the brush 1661 ;
(Fig. 106) for accordi:ngly control~ing the justi ~ying computing and encoding means to operate in accordance with the amount le~t in a justifiable line.

. ' .. . , ~ . . ~ .

.; . . ... ... .. . . . . . ... .. . .
` ~ : ' ~ . . ' .: . .

337~
Amount ~eft In Line on~utator circuits ~ len an operator completes a line and he voluntarily returns the carriage, the switch 1315 (Fig. 83) located in the carriage moving mechanism 149 is automatically closed, by the first unit o~ return movement of the carriage.
Such closure actuates a preliminary circuit which runs from a source of power throu~h wire 137, the tape return key 138 in no~nal position, wire 139, the delete key 140 in normal position, wires 539 and 1329, and through switch 133C ~lich is closed upon first operation of the forward tape cycling mechanism 169. At this point the circuit divides into two . :~
preliminary parallel circuits, one through wires 1331 and 1332 for assuring full operation of tne general key lock mechanism 1335, and for thus locking keyboard keys against operation, and the second through wires 1331 and 1333 for assuring ull.operation of the end of the line tape feed .~ .
control 166-and a resulting punching of a carriage return `-code. :~

Wire 1482 .(Fig. 92), which carries the circuit to . ~ `.~. .
.
the ~mount left in the liIle co~nutator, is secured to contact ring 1658 (Fig. 108). ~ormally, when the line has not :~-extended to a point less than .700" from the right margin, the brush 1661 (~ig. 106) rests on the contact 1654 (Fig. lC8 Wnen this is the condition, and similarly, when the line has ~,:

,.
. -165-.. . . .
~ ' , .

. ~ . . .. ..... . . . . ~ . .,. . . ~ -- .

~53;~'7~

progressed to .675", .650", o625ll, .600" or when the line is completely `filled out ("Eull Line") and the brush rests on contacts 1665, 1666, 1667, 1668 or 1669, respectively, justifying operations are not required, and the current will pass through the contact ring 1658, bn~sh 1650 (Fig.
106~, strip 1663, brush 1661 and the appropriate one of the interconnected contacts 1664-1669 (Fig. 108). These inter~
connected contacts are connected by the wire 1484 (Fig. 92) leading directly to the switch means 1486, without involving an~ ju~tifying processes. However, when the line has pro-gressed to within the justifying area but is not fully filled out, the brush 1661 (Fig. 106) rests on the appropriate one of the contacts 1670-1692 (Fig 10~) and the amount left in the line commutator is conditioned to control the justifying encoding mechanism.
~ A wire 1485 (Fig. 92) leads from each of the con-tacts lG70-1692 (Fig. 108) to a corresponding solenoid, in the dividing and justifying encoding mechanism. Thus,when the line has progressed to any extent from .575" to 025"
of the rignt margin and justifying is initiated the amount left in the line commutator is in condition for controlling - , the dividing and encoding mechanism to operate appropriately.
Since, prior ~o re,~rn of the carriage, a recorded amount left in a line may be increased, due to back spacing, pawl 1655 (Fig. 105) is rendered ineffective during deleting .

~ ~5337~ `
operations and thus the amount left in ~he line mechanism may follow the carriage as the carriage is opera~ed reversely.
The pawl 1655 is also disengaged from tlle xatchet wheel 1578, so as to be ineErective, following justi~ying operations, when the amount registered is no longer needed, in order to permit clearing oi~ the mechanism.
Upon energization of solenoid 127~ (Fig. 10~) link 1710 is pulled leftward, rotating the unit ~ormed of ~ell-: . . .
crank 1707, sleeve 1706, mem~er 1iO5 (Fiy. 105) and mem~er . ~
267 (Fig.17) counterclockwise about shaft 242 against the ~:.
tension of spring 1708 (Fig. 106~o Upon deenergization of solenoid 1278, the spring 1708 rotal:es the unit clockwise to -:
'~he normal position, controlled by rod 243, as sh~n. The .:. :
solenoid 1278 is momentarily energized when the carriage is ~ . .
;:. : ..
fully returned and all functions for a line are complete, and also when the tape return key is depressed following -:
back spacing and the deleted tape is automa~.ically fed for- ~.
w~rdly through the main punches (back space funct.ion is read) As previously explained, the detent 1~55 (Fiy~ 105) ..
is ~loi~n~Llly erfec~ive for holding th e normal 1~3ft in the ;.
line mechanism in operated position when the ju~;tifying key ;.
is Uon" and, the detent is rendered ineffective for holding the ~lount lef~ in the line mec:hanism in operated position when the justifying key is in "off". As described previously, ~. -- ' - ' ' '.
~, ,' ,, '' , , " ' ~,. .
- ~,.~, ., . ., - . . . . . .. . .. . . .

~OS33~Y4 the justifying key switch means renders the justifying circuits, including those controlled by the amount left in the line mechanism ineffective for controlling justifying operations, when the justifying key is in "off" position.
Therefore, there is-no need for holding any amount that may be registered in the amount left in the line mechanism.
, Commutators for Diferential KeY-Locks ;;
The commutator arrangement in the amount left in the line mechanism for the .050" key lock control will now be described.
Switch blades 1713 (Fig. 106) and 1714 are secured on insulator 166~, which is secured on the no~mally upwardly extending arm of the rotary switch blade support lever 1580, and the blades extend generally oppositely from the insulator in clockwise and counterclockwise directions, respectively.
Blades 1713 and l714 are connected by conductor strip 1715, and by rivets 1716 through the strip, blades and the .nsulator 1662. The free ends of the blades are directed slightly for-wardly to ehgage the real~-ard face of t~le contact support plate 1590 (Fig. 18) and certain contacts thereon as will now be explained.
Normally; lever 1580 (Fig. 105) stands at the .700" from the right margin repres~ ting position. In this -168~

~, .

.. .. . . . . .. . . . . ..

~337~
normal position, the ends of blades 1713 and 1714 are engaged ~ ~
with contacts 1717 and 1718 (Fig. 108), respectively, ~ -for completing an end of line clearance circuit which becomes e~fective when the machine is normalizad and the carriage is fully returned.

As the carriage aclvances closer than .700" ~rom . ::,:
the ~ull line positlon, lever 1580 (Fig. 106) moves clockwise -fxom the position shown and blades 1713 and 1714 disengage from contacts 1717 and 1718 (Fig. 108), respectively.
Current may pass through the conductively connected blades 1713 and 1714 (Fig. 106), and the thereby contacted pairs of contacts 1719, 1725 (Fig. 108~; 1720, 1726; 1721, 1727;
1722, 172~3; 1723, 1729; and 17~3, 1730, ~^Jhsn the switch blade support lever 1580 (Fig. 106) is in the .125", .100", .075", ~050", .025" and the Full Line positions, respectively. ~ -The commu~ator arrangement for the .075" Xey-lock control will now be described. `
Contacts 1743 - 1749 (Fig. 109) are interconnectedl ` ~
~ ..
and current may pass through the ~lades 1732, 1733 (Fig. 106) and the strip 1734, when the blades engage the pairs of contacts 1736, 1743; 1737, 1744; 1738, 1745; 1739, 1746; 1740, 1747; 1741, 1748; and 1742, 1749; respectivelyj in the .lS0"
~o end positions, respectively.
The commutator arrangement for the .100" key lock control will now be described.

~, -169- - ~

~ )5~3~
Contacts 1762-1769 (Fig. 109) are interconnected, and blades 1750 and 1751 (Fig. 106) respectively and successively engage the pairs of contacts 1754, 1762 (Fig. 109); 1755, 1763, 1755, 1764; 1757, 1765; 1758, 1766; 1759, 1767; 1760, 1768, and 1761, 1769, when the lever 1580 (Fig. 106) is in the .175" to 0 (End of Line) positions, respectively.

:

26~ DIFFERENTIAL KEY-LOCK MECHANISM
.
Carriage movements are divisible into units of .025", and ~uch movements are always .100~, .075" or .050".
Accordingly, when the carriage is within .075" of the right margin line, the .100" characters, the underline key, and the .100" nut-space keys are not used. ~lurther, w~en the carriage is within .050" and .025" of the right margin, the ~ , ,075~t and .050" character and space keys, respectively, are not used. Therefore, differential printing and space key locks are provided for preventing undesirable operation of respective keys, under the abo~-e circumstances. It should also be noted that the differential key locks will never block operation of a key when its character or space will still flt into the line.
Basically, the mechanism is comprised of (1.) a key lock indexing means (shown particularly in Fig. 112) for at times determining the posi~ion of an operable one of ~wo .. ' ' ~ ' ' ~ ' ~;

-- ~

~LOS;~374 .
bail ~ype key locks as a line is extended to certain limits, (2.) a detent means (Fig. 115) for holding the ~
indexing means in operated position, and (3.~ selectively ~ -operable upper and lower case control means, shown in Fig. 116, for selectively rendering upper and lo~er case bail locks operable and effective as permitted by the in-dexing means for differential locking control of character and space keys in conformity with the upper and lower case condltion of the machine. A differential word and nut space key lock bail arrangement, shown in Fig. 58, is linked with the character key lock mechanism for operation therewith, and this arrangement forms a fourth basic component of the diferential key lock mechanism.
- ,

27. DIVIDING AND ENCODING MECHANISM FOR
JUSTIFYI~G
'- '' . ' .
The dividing and encoding mechanism 1923 (Fig. 92) is located in the cOmpOSing machine, on the lower level at the extreme rear of the machine as indicated in Figs. 1 and `~ -t 45. The dividing and encoding mechanism is comprised of five different means: -I. Word Space Selected Dividing Means 1.) 8 Dividing and Encoding Plate Gr~ups (plate asseMblies) a. -Group centralizers . . ' ' ~ "

.. . . . .. ... .... . , ... .. . ~. , :

~ ' ~

~g~533~4 position to represent another value. Movement of the groups leftward and rightward is accurately limited, in both in-stances, by the alternate extents of the slots 1940 and 1941 and the bushings 19 2 on the shats 1943 and 1944 on which each group assembly is mounted.
Centralizer 1947 (Figs. 120 and 121) is provided for each of the group assemblies for returning and normally main-taining its respective group in the central position. The effect of spring 1952 is such that it will urge the lever 1950 clockwise (Fig. 120) and will urge the lever 1949 counter-clockwise, so as to constantly tend to contact the stationary support shaft 1944 which the levers embrace and to constantly tend to shift the stud 1938, for the respective group assembly, into vertical alignment with bOth of the shafts 1944, and thus tend to Xeep the related group assembly in the normal central-i&ed position. Howe~er, when one of the plate assemblies 1930 or 1931 i5 moved from its normal centralized position, the affected lever 1949 or 1950 will yield against the tension of spring 1952 (Fig. 121), so as to permit such movement.

~ ergization of solenoid 1962 (Figs. 120 and 125) wil}
actuate armature 1961 rightwardly turning bellcrank 1957 clockwise for raising link 1958 or 1959, as the case may be to rotate the related hook 1953 clockwise about the stud 1938, which is part of the related group assembly. This is done in order to select a group assembly and in so doing .~ ~
~ 5;337~

connect ~he assembly to the motivating means.
By referring to Fig. 120, it can be seen that, when a hook 1953 that is connected to one of the upper group assemblies 1930 is operated to select a group, the hook is conr~ecte~ with bail rod 1970, and when the bail unit i5 rocked clockwise the group assembly will be mo~ed rightward, and when such a selection is made and the bail unit is movad counterclockwise about the shaft lg74, the group assembly will be moved leftward. Likewise, when a hook 1953 that is connected to a lower plate assembly 1931 is operated to make a selection, it will couple with ~he bail rod 1971/
so/when the bail unit is xocked clockwise about the axis of shaft 1974j the selected plate assembly will be moved ~e~t-wardly, and so when the bail unit is rocked counterclockwise the selected group will be moved rightwardly.
~ When the~ solenoi~ 1984 is energized (Figs. 125 and 126), it moves link 1983 leftward, and by bellcrank 1981 and link 1979, the bail unit is operated counterclockwise about the axis of shaft 1974. As will appear latex, the solenoid 1984 is energized whenever an odd number is selected under control of the word space counter.
A centralizer 1985 (Figs. 125, 126) is pro~ided for holding the bail unit and connected linkage~ in the normal poSition shown in Fig. 126 and is comprised of two identical members 1986 and 1987.

1(~533~

Since current will be made available to the justifying and encoding mechanism by the word space counter simultane-ously for operating one of the selecting solenoids 1962 (Fig. 120) and one of the motivating solenoids 1978 or 1984 (Fig. 126), a means is provided for delaying operation of the involved motivating solenoid until after proper selection has been completed.
The justifying unit space amount electing and moti~ating slide means will now be described.
First it should be recalled that the plate assemblies 1931 (Fig. 120) are inverted in respect to the plate assem-blies 1930 so as to be equally disposed in respect to slide means 1932, which are situated transversely between the groups 1930 and 1931. The slide means 1932 can best be seen in Figs. 122 and 123. There are twenty three slide means 1932, each corresponding respectively with one of the twenty three units that may be left in justifia~le line. Each slide means 1932 is comprised of a slide pate 1999 (~ig. 123) and an identical slide plate 2000, which is inverted and juxtaposed its companion plate 1399. All o~ the slide means 1932 are identical.
The 23 slide means 1932 are each securely mounted side by side on the shafts 2005 and 2006 which are insulated from the frame but otherwise securely fixed in the assembly. It should be noted that the direct mounting of the plates 1999 ~ 1053374 and 2000 on the shafts 2005 and 2006 provides for conducting current from the shafts to the plates, but since the ends of the shafts are insulated from the frame the current will not be conducted through the frame.
- Only one pair of slide plates 1999 and 2000 will be actuated at any one time and their straight edges 2001 and 2002 will be separated, for contac~ing certain nibs of the dividing and encoding plates in any one opexated plate assembly. When the operated solenoid 2026 is deenergized, the parts associates therewith are returned to the positions shown by the connected spring 2023.
The general configurations common to each of the plates 1933 are shown in Figs. 127.
Each plate 1933 is directly associated with a particular code channel in either a quotient amount encoding punch mechanism or a remainder amount encoding punch mechanism, and, whenever current is passed through a plake, the associated punch is operated to punch the corresponding code bit in the control tape. A group 2032 of eight code channel related bars 2033 are oriented trans~ersely of the plates 1933, as shown, in side-by-side positions corresponding to the quotient channel code bit associations of the plates 1933 which they cross. Six of the bars 2033 are numbered 1 - 6.
Each bar and its number designation corresponds with the related code bit channel and the punch in the quotient ~amount set OL justifying punches.
¦ Each en~ of stationary Dar 2033, for the upper groups 1f plates 1933, is secured in an insulator 2034 (Fig. 123), ¦each of which insulators is secured to the top frame plate 1928. Identical but inverted bars 2033 are secured in insulators 2035, secured to the bottom plate 1929, in positions directly below their related upper bars 2033 for accommodating the lower groups of plates. The cade bit number related upper and lower bars 2033 are connected to-gether by conductor strips 2036, each of which strips is connected by a wire 2037 to a related channel punch solenoid in a quotient amount set of punches, as will be described.
The wires 2037 are secured to their respecti~e strips 2036 by screws 2033 extending throu~h holes therefor in the wire ends of an insulator 2039, plate 1925, an insulator 2040 and a threaded hole in the strips 2036 as shown. The screws 2038 are further insulated from the holes in plate 1925 in a customary manner. From the above, it can be understood that the related channel punch will be operated whenever current passes thorugh either one of the two interconnected code channel related bars 2033.
A group 2041 (Fig. 127) of eight code channel associated bars 2042, identical in shape to the bars 2033 just described, are positioned for bèing contacted by the nibs 2031 of the plates 1933 which represent the code bits ~0533'74 for encoding the number of units in the dividend remainder that may result from division of the amount left in the line by the number of word spaces counted for justifying.
There are eight bars 2042, secured in the upper insulatoxs 2034 (Fig. 123) and eight corresponding inverted bars 2042 fixed in the lowe~ insulators 2035, in the same manner as described for the ~ars 2033~ Each pair of upper and lower bars 2042 ~Fig. 127), except for the first and last to be explained, are ~onnected by conductor strips 2043 (Fig. 123) and wires 2044 running to their related solenoids in the ones remaining set of punches. The bars 2042 that are numbered 2 - 7 (Fig. 127) are the only ones required for accommodating the present coding system. The first and last bars are shown as spares, for use only to increase the capacity or to be used i~ it is d~sired to change the codes to include these channels.
By referring to the Chart C ~elow, it can be seen that code bit channels 1 - 5 are all that are re~uired for encoding all of the possible quotient amounts 1 - 23.
~ikewise, channels 2 - 7 are all that are required for the possible remainder amounts 1 - 15.

-CHART C ~oS33~4 JUSTIFICATION CODES:
QUOTIENT CODE THEREF02 REl~AINDER CODE_T~3r REFOR

2 ~ 6 3 - - - ~ - - 256 3 - - ~ 267 4 - - - - - - - - - - 356 4 _~_~ 257 6 - - - - - - - - - - 2346 . 6 - ~ - - - - ~ - - - 357 . 7 - - - - - - - - - - 2345 . 7 - - - - - - - ~ - - 367 8 --~-- 2456 . . 8 ----------------------2357 g ~ 3456 . 9 - - - - - - - - - - - 2367 . 10 - - - - - - - - - 1256 lO - ~ - ~ 3567 11 - - - - - - - - - 1345 . 11 - - - - - ~ - - - -- 23567 12 ~ - - - 13~6 ~2 - - - ~ - - 37 13 ------------------1356 13 ------------------.2347 14 ------------------13456 .14 --~-- 2457 15 ------------------1234 15 _-------------- 2467 17 ~ - 1236 . lB --------- 1245 .l9 ~ - - - .1246 .20 --------~-- 12456 22 --~ 12356 (This chart is also included among the charts to be found immediately following the Figure Descriptions hereinbefore).

~533~ :
Thus it is seen that the bars 2033 (Fig. 127), numbered 1 - 6, are the only bars necessarily associated with the quotient amounts, in order to accommodate the preferred code arrangement .Likewise, the bars 2042, numbered 2 - 7, are the only bars necessarily associated with the remainders, in order to accommodate this code arrangement.
Graphic representations of the dividing encoding plates .. . . .
1933l in their respective groups, are shown in ~igs. 128-135.
Assume, for a first example, that 7 word spaces are counted and 5 units are left in the line. By dividing 7 into 5 we find the auotlent to be zero and there is 5 units in the remainder, The 5 units in the remainder is ~he only portion of the answer that is significant in this instance, as will appear. In the present example, since 7 word spaces are counted and 5 unlts are left in the line, the assembly 7 - 8 tFig~ 136) is selected and shifted leftward, and the 5th solenoid 2025 znd its slide means 1932 is operated; to contact the nibs o on the operated plates 1933, as previously explained. It should be noted, there are no nibs o shown immediately to the right of the 5th slide means 1932 on .
the plates lg33 desi~nated ~s representing the channels 2, 5, and 6, which are the only c~.~nnels required for representing the "codes for quotientl' in this grOup assembly. However, i337~
there are nibs o, shown immediately to the right of the 5th slide means 1932, on the plates 1933 which represent the channels 2, 5, 6 and ~ that are designated as "code for remainder~, and since these nibs o with their plates are shifted to the left, they make contact with the operated 5th slide means 1932~ Thu~ the code 2, 5, 6, 7 is punched by the justifying punches, as will be described. ~y referring to the list of justifying codes in "Chart C", it can be seen that the code for 5 units left in the line is 2, 5, 6, 7, which is the code punched under control of the di~iding and encoding mechanism in the example above.
~ or a second example, let us assume that 8 word spaces were counted and 12 units wexe left in a line. 8 divided into 12 equals a quotient of 1 plus a remainder of 4. To accommodate this situation, the assembly 7 - 8 (Fig. 136) is selected and shifted rightward, and the 12th slide mPans .
1932 is operated, as described. Wpen this occurs, the nibs x shown to the left of the 12th slide means 1932 are shifted rightward and en~aged by that operated slide means.
The nibs x thus contacted are seen to be on the plates 1933 that are associated with channel 5 among the "Code for q~otient'~ plates, and the piates that are assoc~ated with the chsnnels 2, 5, 7 among the "code for remainder" plates.
~hus the control for punching the code 5 by the q~otient ', -1~2-~L~)S3~'7~L
amount justifying punches, and the control for punching 2, 5, 7 by the remainder justifying punches is established, and these codes wilL be punched by these punches as will be described later. 3y referring to the codes for justifying in ~;Chart C", l~ may be seen that the code ~ for the quotient column repres~nts the quotient o~ 1, while the code 2, 5, 7 for the remainder column represents a remainder af 4~ Thus, when these codes for the ~econd example axe read, the reproducing machine will be prepared to add one unit to each o the 8 word spaces in the line, and ik is also prepared to add another unit to the first 4 word spaces in the line, as will be explained. In this manner., the 12 units left in the unjustified line will be added to justi~y the reproduced line.
In a third example, assume t'n~re are 15 word spaces and 16 nits left in the line. In this case, tha asse~bly l -16 (Fig. 136) is selected and shifted rightward, and tne nibs o on the plate 1933 associated with channel 5 "code for quotient", and the plate 1933 associated witb ~h nnel 7 "code for remainder'l will make contact with the operated 16th slide means 1932. Thus, the code S and the code 7 are both established for control of the two sets o~ justifying punchesj as will be dPscribed. By referring to the lists of codes ~or justifying (Chart C), it can be seen that code 5 .siynifies a quotient o~ 1 which is the number or units that .. ' ' ,'"' ., ,'' , ,"' ~ .~S;~3'~
will be added to each of the 15 word spaces in the line, and that code 7 signifies a remainder of 1 unit which extra unit will also be added to only the first word space in the justified line. ~hus, the 15 units added to the word sFaces in the line and the extra unit also added to the first word space equal 16 units, which will justify the line, in this third situation.
Similarly, by performing such further tests, it can be seen that ~he arrangement can accommodate all situations, and all lines having 23 or less units left at the end of the unjustified line and having one or more word spaces will be justified automatically in the first 16 or less word spaces in the reproduced justified line.

.' , . , ~ ~

28. JUSTIFYI~G PUNCEES AND THEIR _PERATIO~

The justifying punches comprise two separate sets of mechanism, the punches of which are located one normal tape feed step apart. One set of justifying punches 2046 (Fig. 38) is provided for encoding the remainder amount, and the other set 2047 is provided for encoding the quotient amount of the division operations performed by the justifying mechanlsm.
Remainder punch mechanism 2050 IFig. 92) is comprised primarily of solenoids 2051-l through 2051-7 (Fig. 37) and -184~ -, .
:,. ' ~':' :

........ . . -. - ~ ~:

~L~5337~ i associated levers ~052-l through 2052-7; seven of each being shown here although only six (Channels 2-7) are required to accommodate the preferred code as previously mentioned and as lndicated in ~Chart C" hereinabove.
A quotient punch mechanism 2061 is comprised primarily of solenoids 2062-1 through 2062-7 (Fig. 37) and associated levers ~063-1 through 2063-7; seven of each being shown here although only SlX 3channels 1-6) are required to accommodate the preferred code as previously mentioned and as indicated in "cha-t C" hereinabove.
When a justifying code or codes (Quotient code, remainder code, or both) are punched in the tape and the justifying punch or punches are withdrawn, a normally open switch 2073 (Figs. 37 and 92) is closed for causing the encoded line, 1ncluding the justifying codes, the encoded text for the line and the carriage return code, to be auto-matically fed forwardly out of the loop 753 (Fig. 38), through the justifying punch stations sufficiently ~or the i.
.last code (carriage return code~ to enter the main reader at station M./R and ~e encoded tape may be accumulated in a loop 2074, as will be explained later. j . . .
When a line extends into the justifying area and there is less than .600" (when there are 23 units or less) :
left in the line, the secondary line terminating circuit will ~
' ~

~ -185- ~ .

.
, :: ,. . . .
... . . . ,... . . ~ - , - . .

.. ~ .

~ 3374 pass through wlre 1482 (Fig. 92), ring 1658 (Fig. lOa), brush 1660 (Fig. 106), strip 1663, brush 1661, and the contact 1670-1692 (Fig. 108) or 1669 that the brush 1661 (Fig. 106) may then be enyaged with as described. When the line is perfectly filled out and the blade 1661 is on contact 1669 (Fig. 108), justifying is not required as described previously.
However, when the blade 1661 (Fig. 106) is on one of the contacts 1670-1692 (Fig. 108), justifying will occur and the circuit will travel through the engaged contact and a respect-ively connected wire 1485 (Fig. 92). The other ends of the wires 1485 are each respectively connected to one of the sol~noids 2026. Thu9, when current travels through one of the wires 1485, the appropriate solenoid 2026 (Fig. 123) is energized for operating the pair of slide plates 1932, to represent and thereby enter the number of units left in the line as a dividend in the dividing and encoding mechanism -1923 (Fig. 92).
Current will pass thrcugh wire 2097 (E`ig. 64), conductor 2098, the blade 2100 (Fig. 63) that i~ in a position corresponding to the number of word spaces counted, through one of the contacts 2101-2116 (Fig. 64) in a pair, through one of the wires 2118 (Fig. 92) that is connected to said pair, and through one of the selecting solenoids 1962 and goes to ground;as indicated. By operation of one of the solenoids t'''"' 1962, a particular plate assembly 1930, 1931 (Fig. 120) is ,~

-186 `
~ :
.. , ' - - . ' ~ ~.

3~
selected for operation. The sele~ted assembly will be operated in one direction for representing the odd number or the other directionifor representing the even number of the effective pair of contacts in Fig. 64 and for thus entering the number of counted spaces in the line as the divisor in the computation.
Upon full operation of the selecting solenoid 1962 (Fig. 120), its bel~crank 1957 is rotated and the bail member 1996 is rotated clockwise for elevating insulator 1998 and ~or thereby closing switch 1994 (Fig. 125). The switch 1994 is closed for operating either solenoid 1978 (Fig. 126) or solenoid 1984, depending on whether the counted number of word spaces is even or odd. '~
The circuits and sequences resulting from return of the justifying punches will now be described. Upon return of the justifying p~}nches, the switch 2073 (Fig. 37) is closed. This completes the circuit running from a power source, through switch 2073 (Fig. 92~, wires 2127 and 1484, solenoid 2128 for closing both switches 2131 and 2132 (Fig. 138~, and it continues through wire 1487 (Fig. 92), for the secondary line terminating sequence under the condition where justifying encoding did not occur in a line that was short of the justifying area. Briefly, this c.lrcuit continues through solenoid 944 for clearing the space counter, .

. .
', "
- . . . -., :

~ 3~
through wire 1488 and solenoid 1010 for restoring the mechanism 1483 as described, on through wires 1011, 1013, 1489, 1~90 and the solenoid 1491 for operating the clearing circuit breaker 1~92. The circuit continues to ground through wire 1493 and blades 1494, 1496. When the solenoid 1~91 is fully operated, the breaker 1492 operates for shifting the blade 1496 and breakin~ the just described circuit and for connecting the blade 1496 with blade 1497, When blade 1496 is thus shifted, the circuit from source through switch 2073, wires 2127 and 2159, solenoid 2094, wire 2160 and engaged blades 1497 and 1496 operates the solenoid 2094 (Fig. 37) for releasing the switch 2073 and for thus breaking the circuits through switch 2073 ~Fig~ 92).
Upon operation of solenoid 2128 for closing switches `: ;
2131 and 2132, the circuit th~ough switch 2131 and wire 2153 . : :
is established or operating solenoid 2156, which is part of a tape feed means 2161 and which provides the motive force that feeds the tape through ~he justifying punches(out of loop 753 (Fig. 38) and into loop 2074~
The tape will be fed through the justifying punches - . ..
(Yig. 38), out of loop 753 and into loop 2074, step-by-step as long as the switch 2131 (Fi.g. 92) is closed. Howeve~
as soon as the loop 753 (Fig. 38) is eliminated and the rod -18~
'.'~ '.

.. ~ ' . .

~ 53~74 1036 is depressed by the tape 5i7 as described previously, . the switch 1033 (Fig. 67) is snapped closed for completing the circuit thxough solenoid 2129 (Fig. 92), wire 2157 and now closed switch 2132 in the switch means 1486, and on through wire 2158 and now closed switch 1033. Operation of solenoid 2129 (~ig. 138) causes switches ~131 and ~132 to be snapped open as described. The opening of switch 2131 (Fig. 92) terminates the cyclic operation of solenoid 2156 and stops feeding of the control tape, and opening of switch 2132 deenergizes the operat~d solenoid 2129.

'.

29.__FULL CARRIAGE RETURN RESTORING CIRCUIT

At this point in the line terminating processes, the :
forward tape cycling control means 169 (Fig. 92) lS restored ~
- and the switch 1330 is open, and the justifying punches are ; -:
returned and switch 2073 is reopened. However, at this . .~
point, the switch 1315 (Fig~ 79 and 83) that was closed when ~:
the ~arriage was flrst moved in the return direction remains closed, the clearing sequence control 1492 (Fig. 92) is still ;: ' .
in operated condition, the end of line measuring mechanism 1443 is held for clear~ng as the carriage returns out of the justifying area, the keys on the keyboard remain locked by mechanism 1335, the carriage return circuit breaker 1341 (Fig. 83) remains in operated condition, and the space , ,,~ r --L8 ' ., , :

, _, , , _ ., ~ . . .. .... .. . ..

~ 7 33'~
counter's clearing means that was operated by solenoid 944 (Fig. 92) is held in the clearing condition. When the end of line measuring mechanism 1483 is re~urned to zero, when the space counter has returned to zero, when the carriage is fully returned against the left margin stop and when the encoded tape for the just completed line is fully fed through the justifying punches, the mechanisms just mentioned as .
being held or otherwise as being in operated condition are released and restored by a carriage return restoring circuit which origlnates in a power source and wire 1273 (Figs. 80 and 140), and it operates solenoid 1274 Eor opening the switch 1315 (Figs. 79 and 83).
When the machine is set to justify, the carriage is blocke-d against return, and therefore the line will not be ' concluded, and justifying encoding will not be performed, whenever a word space is the last bit encoded in a line j~ ;
that extends sufficiently to justify (i,e. the line extends .
into the justifying area). It can be understood that such an inadvertent use of a word space would destroy the justifying . :
effect. However, deletisn of such a word space will release the carriage for return and therefore it will release the maFhine for justifying encoding.

, ..':

-130- ~
' , , ~' , .

.: .
- -. .
.. ., ., . . ., . . . . , - - - i - - ~ ... . . .

~5~33~'~
O T~ MAIN_READER

Proceeding with the tape handling for a normal justi~ication encoded line, the encoded tape (including justifying codes, the encodad text for the line and the carriage return code, in that order) is now accumulated in loop 2074 ~Fig. 38) ready to be gerved into the main reading device at station "M,R" for control of the reproducing machine.
The main reader will now be described. Seven wires 2216 are connected directly, to respectlve channel related operating solenoids in a main decoder in the repro-ducing machine not show~ here. The main decoder, which is p~ovided for controlling the reproducer to per~orm according to the codes read by the main reader (at M,R), will be :
described to a greater exte~t and it will be shown schematic- `
ally hereinafter. In other forms of the invention, other communication means may be inserted intermediate the ends o~ wires 2216. These other means may include madia such as teletype, radio, or any other means capable of transmitting codified impulses. In other words, the wires 2216, and the few other wires to be described later, that may conn~ct the composing and reproducing machines may be considered broadly as communication means~

..

,' . ~ ,.

,, , , ,,,,, , ,,,, ,, ,, , ,, , " , , ,, " ,.", .", ,.. . . . . . ~ .. ......... , . . . ~ . -.:

~ 3S ~ 3 Y ~
One end o~ the wires 2216 are held in indi~Jidual conductive engagement with code channel related sensing springs 2220.
The ends of the sensing springs 2220 normally are pressed against the bottom of the control tape 577, which insulates the springs from a conductor plàte 2227 that is common to all the springs and above the taper The arrangement is such that, when a code punch hole .. :
in the tape 577 (Fig. 38j is shlfted into station "M,R" the ;~
curved upper end of the channel related sensing spring 2220 contacts the plate 2227.through the hole, and it completes a circuit through the channel related wire 2216 and sensing spring 2220 and through the plate 2227, x~vets 2231 and plate 2229 :.
for controlling the reproducing or slave machine according ~ .
to the code sensed. :
A means for step feeding the tape through the main reader will now be. described~
Upon energization of solenoid 2240 (Fig. 55) the . -:
solenoid pulls linX 2241 and rotates the bellcrank 2242 cloc~ise.
against a limit stud 2260 which is secured on plate 556.
Upon clockwise operation o the bellcrank, the pawl 2244 i9 shifted rightward suf~iciently to ratchet the hook portion 2247-beyond one tooth on the ratche~ 2234. Simultaneously, .. .
upon c.~ockwise operation of belLcrank 2242, the stud 2248 ;-~
on the bellcrank shifts the lever 2250 counterclockwise.

,' ;'', "~
- lg2 -.
. . ' . -- . ., ~, . . - .

- - \
~ L~S337~
Whereupon, the centerline o~ spriny 2253 is shifted above the center of pivot stud 2251 and the spring snaps the member 2252 clockwise against stud 2259, swinging the insulator away from the switch 2257 and permitting the switch to open.
Upon deenergi2ation of solenoid 2240, the spring 2243 restores the bellcrank 2242 countexclockwise. Upon restoxation of the bellcrank, the pawl 2244 is shifted left-ward and its portion 2247 rotates the ratchet 2234 and the sprocket arrangement clockwise ~or advancing the control tape 577 (~ig. 38) one code space extent thro~gh the main reader station M.R. Simultaneously, of course, upon restora-tion of the bellcrank, the spring 2253,(Fig. 55) is restored below stud 2251 and it restores the member 2252 back against the stud 2258 where the insulator 2256 again closes the switch 2257 as shown.
As the reading and feeding process continues, the amount of slack control tape that was stored in loop 2074 ~Fig~ 38) may be eliminated as in cases where the operations of the reproducing machine catch up with those o~ the composing machine. On such an occasion, as loop 2074 is eliminated, the tape 577 depresses a rod 2261 (~ig. 36) for operating a tape sensing means to interrupt the reading and fee~ing process. When the tape 577 (Fig. 38) is drawin down on the rod 2261, the rod, the lever 2262 (Fig. 55), the shaft 2264 and the bellcrank 2263 (FigO 67) are rotated counterclockwise about the axis of shaft 2264, against tension of a torsion .. - , ._ . = . . . .. . .. ... . . .. .. .... ... ... . ... . . . . .. . . .

~533'7~ :
spring ~265.
The bellcrank 2263 (Fig. 67) is rotated toward stop 2274 and its stud 2266 rotates lever Z267 clocXwise.
At about the time the centerline o~ spring 2270 passes the center of pivot stud 2-268, the spring rotates member 2269 against stud 2276. When this occurs, insulator 2277 is snapped `~
away from switch 227S and the switch opens~ As the direction of in~luence of spring 2270 changes, the ~ust described travel of bellcrank 2263 and lever 2267 is limited by stud 2274. The snap switch 2278 will stand in this position normally whenever the reproduclng machine has completed all work that is completely codified (i.e. line complete and carr~age returned) in the composing machine.
Following the ~bove condition, when further work is done and the tape for this work is fed through the jus~ifying punches 2046 and 2047 (Fig. 38) another loop 2074 is ~ormed and the rod 2261 is raised by the influence of ..
spring 2265 (Fig. 67). When this occurs, bellcrank 2253 is . .
rotated against stud 2273 and lever 2267 is returned counter-clockwlseO As the centerline of spring 2270 passes to the left of the center of stud 2268, the sprixlg snaps th,e member , 2269 clockwise against stud 2275 and the insulator 2277 is driven against the switch 2278 ~or closing the switch.
This is the condition o~ this slack tape sensing means, when .
. .

-19~- ~

. .
. . , . ~ .
.

.

~ ~533~

wor~ is encoded ready for the main reader and the reproducing machine.
As described hereinbefore, the justification code for the quotient amount and the remaindex are punched by the justi~ying punches 2246 and 2247 (Fig. 38) one code space increment apart. As also explained, these ~ustifying codes are spaced ahead of the first code of the text for the lir.e an amount equal to the distance between the justify-ing punches and the main punches, 567, which distance is commensurate to the normal code spacing. As also explained, ~h~ t~xt and function codes for the line are l~ca~ed in consecutive increments thereafter. As further explained herei~beore, the text for the line terminates with a carriage return code, and, upon punching of the carriage return code, the tape i5 fed through the main punches an end-of-line amount suficient to permit the carriage return code to enter the main reader MoR and the entire coded tape for the line is fed through the justi~ying punches sufficiently or the entire coded tape for the line to enter the main reader.
Wires are directly connected with the previously described tape senser, the tape feed mechanism and the main reader.
The entire main reading and feeding processes will now ~e presented. Assume that the hinged cover 579 (Fig. 40) .

.. . .

i~33t~
is latched closed and the switch 2281 is closed, that there is encoded tape for an entire line in the loop 207a (Fig. 143) and the sensing switch 2278 is therefore closed, and tnat ~he reproducing machine is othe~is~ operable.
Assume furthsr th~t the encoded tape for the line includes justi~ication codes.
A clear spaca (end of line ~nount~ of control tape 577 ~s always provided following the carriage reiturn code.
~ clear space, equal to the distance between the remainder punches 2046 (Fig. 38) and the main punches 567, is provided between the justi~ying codes and the first code for the text of the line.
As soon as a carriage return operation is initiated in the reproducer 2279 (Fig. l43), the switch 2289 is moment-arily opened (code set) for deenergizing the solenoids 2291 a~d the cocking solenoid 2240 and for thus pe~mitting restoration of the decoder ~292 and the main reader feed rn2chanism respectivelyO Upon deenergiza~i~n of ~olenoid 22~0 the tape is fed one step through the main reader as déscribed.
In the carxiage return sequence of the ~ach1ne 2279 the switch 2289 is again closed, but, s inc e no code clo~ely follows the carriage returr. co~e, the sensing springs 2220 will no' complete the read circuit. Whe~ the carriage is fully returned, the current through w~ e 304 now~closed `

.

.

~ 533~4 switch 2298 and wire 2305 operates solenoid 2301 ~or re-leasing latch 2299 and restoring the feed-read switch means 2287 as described.
Upon restoration o means 2287, the switch 2298 is opened for deenergizing solenoid 2301, and the switch 2297 is closed for rendering the feed cixcuit effective.
The effective feed circuit runs from source o. power through wire 2280, now closed switch 2281, wire 2282, now closed switch 2278, wire 2283, cocXing solenoid 2240, wire 2302, alt~rnately closed and opened switch 2257, wire 2303 and it go-s to ground through the ~w closed switch 2297 which remalns closed until a code is read whereb~ read circuit becomes e~fective. The cocXing or ~eed solenoid 2240 ~FigD 55) is thus energized, whereupon the switch 2257 is snapped open for deenergizing the solenoid 2240 and permitting the spring 2243 to advance the control tape 577 (Fig. 143) one step and again closing switch 2257 for again operating solenoid 2240. The tape f2ed mechanism is thus repeatedly operated and restored ~or successive step feeding of the control tape through the main reader.
The reader circuit becomes immediately e'~ecti~-e as soon as a iustlfying code (usually first tne quotient amount code) moves into registration with t'ne sensing springs 2220 of the main reader. The xeader circuit runs from .
- 197~

' . . .

- ` :

~ L~533~
source of power through wire 2280, switch 2281, wire 2282, switch 2278, wire 2283, feed cocking solenoid 2240, wire 2284, solenoid 2286 for operating s~titch means 2287, wire 2288, now closed switch 2289, wire 2290, the decoder solenoids 2291 which relate to the quotient amount code, the wires 2216, the efective sensing springs 2220, the conductor 2227 and it goes to ground through the wire 2293.
At the'same time solenoid 2~40 is energized, the solenoid 2286 is energized,.to open switch 2297 and to render the ~eed circuit ineffective so there will be no further ..
'i~medi2te consecutive feed operations o the solenoid 22~0.
At this point, switch.2289 remains closed and ths reader circuit'is sustained while the reproducer is operated according to the code, and, the tape is not ~ed until the solenoid 2240 is deenergized. Thus, the solenoids 2240 and 2286, and the code relat~d solenoids 2~91 remain energized for a bit.
- Operation of the solenoids 2291, in this instance ' to represent the quotient amount, a~fects the decoder.2292 accordingly to control the repxoducer 2279 to set up for adding the quotient amount of the ~ustifylng information to ~he first sixteen word spaces or less, as the case may be, in the reproduced text of the line tha~ follows. - ~lring this set up operation of the reprodu~er 2279, in this instance as soon as the quotient amount is se~ up -therein, the switch .

.

~L~53374 2289 is momentarily opened for breaking the reader circuit~As the solenoid 2240 is now deenergiæed, the feed mech~nism feeds the tape one step as described, removing the just read quotient code out of the main reader and eeding the rem~inder code into the main reader. As the reproducer 2279 complete~ the registration of the quotient amount, the re-producar closes the switch 2289 so another code may be read, and, at about the same time, the solenoid 2301 is energized as described for restoring the switch means 2287 and rendering the feed circu~t effective through switch 2297 In the e~ent there is no remainder code, d~ue to even division of the number of units left in the line by the number of word spaces as described in connection with ~ustifying encoding, blank tape (no code) will now be in the read~r. In this case the feed circuit will take effect upon - of closure/switch 2297, and the blank tape will be fed by the feed circuit until the first text code is read.
In the event a remainder code exists and is now sensed, the read circuit immediately takes effect, and the cocking solenoid 2240, read solenoid 2286 and the code related solenoids 2291 are operated. Operation of solenoid 2286 opens switch 2297 for rendering the fe~d circuit ineff-ective, solenoid 2240 operates to cock the fee~ tape mechanism for a single step of the tape and the code related solenoids 2291 operate the decoder 2292 according to the remaindsr code.

~ -- -- ~

~S337~

Operation o the soleno~cs 2291, in this instance to represent the remainder, affects the decoder accordingly to control the reproducer 2279 to set up for adding one unit to each o~ the first word spaces, that correspond in number to the remainder, in ~he reproduced.text of the line that follows. When ths remainder is properly set up in the reproducer 2279, the reproducer momentarlly opens .its switch 22~9 for breaking the reader circuit. As the solenoid 2240 is now deenergized, the ~eed mechanic~m feeds the tape one step, removing t~a just read remainder code out o the main reader and feeding in a bit o~ the clear tape that follows the justifying codes. As the reproducer 227g completes registration of the remainder, the reproducer cioses the switch 2289 s~ the next succeeding code (the first code for the text) may be.read, and, at about the same time, the solen~id 23.01 is energized, for res~oring the switc;~
means 2287 and rendering the feed circuit effectlve through switch 2297. Since there is nc code now ir th~ mai~ readex .. .
.
. and the sensing springs do not immediately sense a code, the read ci~cuit will not immediately operate, even though the swi~ch 2289 is closed. However, since the switch 2297 is now closed, the solenold 2240 and snap switch 2257 will operate, to feed the clear tape that alw~ys lies between the ~usti.fying codes and the first text code.through the main reader.

. _ ~
200~
. ~ . .'' / .

~33~

As soon as a text code ~function, letter, number, figure, space, etc.) is shifted into registration with the sensing springs 2220 the read circuit is immediatelY efective for operating the coc~ing solenoid 2240, the read solenoid 2286, and the code related decoder solenoids 2291. Operation of the read solenoid 2286 shifts the switch means 2287 to open the ~eed circui~ switch 2297 and to latch the switch means in operated position where it remains throughout the reading of the successive text codes, since the feed solenoid 2301 is not ~perated following text operations of the reproducer 2279.
However, operation of the decoder 2292 and accordingly the reproducer 2279 in per~ormance of a text operation results in the opening of the read circuit switch 2289, whereupon the feed mechanism shifts the succeeding code into registration with the sensing sprlngs 2220. As soon as the reproducer compla~es one text operatio~, it closes the switch 2289 for reading the next code now in the reader. In this manner, the cycling of the text readlng operations and the related operations of the reproducer 2279 are efected as the repro-ducer`opens and closes the switch 2289.
Once a text code is read, the feed circuit is not again rendered effective ~hrough switch 2297 until the carriage return code is read at the end of the text. Upon reading the carriage return code, the read circuit and the ', ' .

. ' ' ~ 5~3~4 decoder 2292 cause the reproducer to return its carriage and to open the read circuit switch 2289 for effecting the normal tape faed step etc. as described. Upon ~ull return o~ the carriage, the reproducer 2279 again closes the read ~ircuit switch 2289 and at about &e same time the reproducer feeds cu~rent through wire 23~4, naw closed switch 2298, wire 2305 and the feed solenoid 2301 for restoring the switch means 2287 and closing the feed switch 2297, the same as ater justi~ying set up operations. Thus, the arrangem~nt i5 again conditioned to feed the clear tape that follows the carriage return code, and to read the first code for the s~cceedlng line. The arrangement will re~d the next code and per~orm as described, whether the first code for the ne~
line is a justi~ying code, or, as at times when the iine is not to be justified, the firs-t code or the line is a text code.

However, under the above conditions, if no succ-eeding line is prepared and stored ln loop 2074, the slack tape sensor switch 2278 will be opened, as the carriage re-turn code is shited out of the reader, and thus both the feed circuit and the read circuit will be rendered ineffective until a succeeding encoded line is fed into the loop 2074 and the switch 2278 is then closed by the sensing means.

31. S PACE AT E~ OF L:l:NE PP~EVENTED
The details o the previously mentioned mechanism for recording the underlines, word spaces or nut spaces that may occur in a line after the line has been extended into the _~02-.. .. , .,. ... ,.... . ,~

~ c~
justifying area, has been generally described and is known as space at end of line preventing mechanism 2306 (FigO 45), which is shown particularly in Figs. 144-152.

32. BOLD-REGULAR AND PRI~T--NO PRINT
E'UNCTIONS ANI) ENCODING

The details of the bold and regular encoding means is shown in Figs. 15~-157. A bold and regular shift key ~487 (Fig. 3) is located conveniently at the right side of the keyboard as shown, and it is shitable orward as shown or rearward to encode in the composin~ machine for "bold" and "r~gular" operation of the reproducer, respectively, as indicated on the keyboard cover. In the composing machine, the position of the Xey 2487 merely indicates to the operator that the reproducer will reproduce according to the position of the key. In other words, the text typed on the composing machine, when its key 2487 is in "bold" position, will be reproduced in darker ~greater intensity) type by the repro-ducer, and the text typed on the composing machine, when its Xey 2487 is in "regular" position, will be reproduced in normal intensity tYpe by the reproducer. In order to encode for the particular face type, a code ~67 (bold face code) is punched on the control tape by the main punches as soon as the key 2487 is shifted to its "bold" position, and a code S67 tRegular face code) is pu~ched by the main punches as soon as the key 2487 is shifted to its "regular" position as will be de~cribed. The "bold face" an~ "regular face" function codes are listed in "Chart D" below, with the other function codes to be described later. "Chart D" may also be found ~5;~3'7~
among the charts that ~ollow the Figure Descriptions here inbe fore .

CH~RT D
E'UNCTIO~ CODES:

FUNCTION CODE
, Carriage return............. ..12~7 Line delete....... ~ ........ .3457 Clear (normal) ............. .3467 Line spac-~................. .4 Rev. Line space............. .45 Upper case.................. .46 Lower case........ ~ ........ .47 No PriT~t......... ~ ........ O . 456 Print.................. ~ ... .457 Bold Face~ ................ . .467 Delete j any code &........ . .4567 Stop printer............... . .56 Back Space func............ . .57 Regul.ar face.............. . .567 - a~4-.' '', ' ' , " ,' , '' ' , ~L~5~3 ~ ~
The print control key and its encoding arrangement is shown in Figs. 154-15~. When the print control kev 2488 (Fi.gO 155) is shifted clock~ise to the illustrated "print"
position, it normally causes the "print" code 4, 5, 7 to be encoded on the tape, and, when this code is read by the main reading de~ice, it will prepare the reproducer to print and move the carr~ge according to the character and space codes that ~ollow. When the key 2488 is shifted counterclocXwise to the indicated "no print" position, it normally causes the "no print" code 4, 5, 6 to be punc~ed on the tape, and this code will prepare the reproducer to move the carriage accord-ing to the characters and space codes that may ~ollow but printing of such characters will not occur.

13. CLEAR K~Y A~D ITS FU~CTIONS

A clear key 2633 (Figs. 3 ~ 159) is provided as a means for immediately preparing the com~os~ng machi~e fGr normal operation, i.e., lower case, print, regular and punch condition,~and at the same time, as a means for causing punching of the clear code 3, 4, 6, 7 which will control the reproducer to as lme the normal condition. I~ the clear key is operated when a piece of work is begun, the operator can be assured that the reproducer will assu~e the corresponding condition and will reproduce the text properlv instead o, . . .
' ' ' . - , - ;-2~S-~OS~

possi~ly beginning in the wrong case, in no print instead of print, bold instead of regular, etc. The operator should not operate.the clear X0y when the punch control key 602 (Fig. 3) is in no punch position and the machine has been operated for a portion o a line, since, if both of these conditions exist, the no-punch portion o the line would not ~e reproduced and the rest of the line would be quad-left.
However, the clear key may be properly used at any time the carriage is fully returned or the kay 602 has been.in punch position/ during the prepared composition of the line.
A s.olenoid 2661 (~ig. 159) is pro~ided for at times operatins the clear key 2633 automatically, as in a sequence . ollowing "line delete" operations.
- Manual or automatic aperation of the clear key 2633 (Fig. 161) effectuates clearing of the composing machine and punching of the clear code for corresponding control of the reproducer. The circuit travels from Source ("S") through normally clos2d swi.ch lZ13, wire 1295, the so~enoid 1296 for - parmitting restoration of the case shift key to normal position, wire 1307, solenoid-1308 for releasiny the shift Xey lock for possible return to lower case, wires 1309 and 2663, the solenoid 2664 for restori.ng the punch Xey 602 (Fig~ 44) to normal punch.on position, for res-torins tne print conteol key 2488 to normal print position and bold-reg~lar - - ~

~U53374 shift ~ey 2487 to regular position, through wire 2665 (Fig. 161), solenoid 2666 for restoring the case shift snap switch arrangement to lower case, through wire 2667, solenoid 2668 for restoring the bold and regular snap switch arrangement to regular, through wire 266~, solenoid 2670 far restoring the print control snap switch arrangernen'~ to normal print condition, and via the wires 2671 an~ 2672 to the contacts 265$ and 2658 under the operated key 26330 Upon depression o the key 2633, the contacts 2655 and 2658 are conn~cted with contacts 2656, 26~7 and 2659, 2660, respectively, and thus the circuit diviAes into parallel circuits through the wires 2673~2676 (Flg. 162), the code channel punch wires 3, 4, 6, 7 and the corresponding solenoids in the main punch mechanism 161 for punching the clear code. At thls point, - the parallel circuits merge as described into the wire 16 (FigO 11), and the circuit continues through switch 669, wire 163, switch 164, wire 165, control 166, wire 167 and goes to ground through solenoid 168 for operating the solanold and preparing or forward feeding of the co~ltrol tape through the main punches, the same as for other normal main punch operations .

-.
' ' .
, -2~?- , . .
.. . ...

~5337~

34. CONDITIO~ E~TCOD~G A~D KE~' TEEREFOR

This arrangement is provided ror encodlng the immediate condition tupper or lower case, bold or regular, and print or no print) of the composing machlne upon manual operation of a condition key 2707 (~igs. 3 & 160). The condition encoding arrangement does not alter the condition of the composing machine, but it does ~ontrol the main punches to punch a code that represents ~he condition of the composing mach.ine, and the code controls the reproducer to assume the corresponding ~onditi.on when the main reader senses the code.
The condition key 2707 may be used instead of the clear key 2633 (Fig. 3) previously described, when a piece of worX is begun, to aàsure proper coordination between the succeeding encoded text and the condition of the reproducer.
Since the condition.encoding arrange~ent do~s not alter the set up of the composing machine, the arrangement may be .utilized at any time, but it or tne clear key should be used to begin a piece of work whenever there is a possibility that the tape for the work may be separated from the other tape and stored for future reuse.
The circ~it (Figs. 30 and 162) originating upon depression of the condition key 2707 and passing through wire 2720 is directed through binary type switch system in the upper-lower case, the bold-regular and print-no print swi~ch . .
. -2~8-- ' . ' , ' S33~'~
arrangements and the current is fed to the one of the solenoids 2756, 2759, 27~1, 2763, 2765, 2767, 2769 and 2771 that corresponds to the instant condition of the machine.
The operated one of the just listed solenoids in the condition encoding mechanism 2757 will cause the mechanism to control the main punches 161 to encode tha condition o~ the machine.
By way o example, let us assume now that the machine is in normal condition and accordingly the disk 423 (Fig. 162) is in lower case position, disk 2512 is in regular position and disk 2582 is in print position, and that the condition key 2707 is operated. Upon closure of contacts 2713 and 2714 by brush ~710 (Fig. 160), the circult is ,complete from source thxough these contacts under key 2707 (Fig.~ 162) wlres 2720, 2725, 2735 and wire 2755 for operating solenoid 2756 which closes a switch 2788.
-The circuit continues through solenoid 7.75~, wires 2775 and 2773 and goes to ground through solenoid 2777 fo-r closing swltch ~781. Closure of switch 27S8 (~ig. 155), which is like switch 2781 (Fig. 164), causes punching of code channels 3 and 4, and closure of switch 2781 causes !
punching of code channels 1 and 7 to complete the code 1, ~, 4, 7 that corresponds to the normal condition of the machine.
The solenoids ~756 and 2777 (Fig. 162~ in tne mechanism 2757 remain operated while the solenoid 2718 operates to release the condition key 2707, and while the main punches .

-2~9-' ' ' ' . ' `~ ~

~5~33'7~

operate to punch, in this instance, the normal condition code 1, 3, 4, 7~ Upon full operation OL solenoid 2718 (Fig. 160), the pawl 2716 releases the Xey 2707 and the spring 2708 returns the key to break the circuit through the contacts 2713 and 2714.
As the cixcuit is now broken between contacts 2713 and 2714 (Fig. 162), the solenoids 2756 and 2777 are deenergized for permitting switches 2788 and 27~1 to open for dèenergizing solenoid 2718, the operated solenoids in t~e main E~nch mechanism 161, and deenergizing the solenoid 168 (Fig. 11~, whereupon the tape is ~ed one step fo~ardly through main punches.
Thus, it is seen that the code _, 3, a, 7, is punched, when the machine is in normal condition and the condi~ion key is operated. A di~ferent representa~ive condition code is also punched in a similar manner when the machine is in any other condition and the condition key is operated.
., ~
..

- - 3S. LINE DELETE
.
: ~he Line Delete key 1479 (Figs. 3 & 141) is provi~ed for el~minating the effectivity of a line of ~eY~t and the arrange~ent is particularly advantageous for making -2~0-:

~ ~S33~7~
corrections by elin;inating a long line ~h~t is n~arlv complete when an error near the begin~ing of the lin2 is detected.
i Upon depre~sion of the Line Delete key 1179, the key first renders the justi~ying encoding mechanism ineffective, it then prep~res circuits fo~ operating the justifying ~unches to encode a Line Dalet2 code ah*ad of ~he text for the line and it locks do~n. Then, the operator must return the carriaga to bri~1~ a~ut th~ no~mai line terminating process o~ causin~ th~ main punches to indicate carriage return and in sequence of feeding the tape the end of line amount through the main punches, and finally, in this instance, to cause the justifying punches (specifically the re-mainder set of justifying punches) to punch the~line delete code. Operation and restoration of the justifying punchès ~hen au~omatically causes the line of encoded text to be fed through the justirying punches as described.
Upon readin~ Gf a llne delete code by th~ main reader, the reproducer is ronditioned to ignore all codes for the line except the carriage return code which then conditions the reproducer to perform the codes for the next line.
In the preferred for~ of the machinej the "Clear"-"Set" Xey 2824 (Fig. 166) is provided for predetermining whether the machine will automatically perform the clearing .

-2~1-.

.

1C~5i33~
function or the condition encoding operations following line dele~e and carriagQ return operations. In the "Set"
position of the key 2824, the machine will perrorm the auto- ;
matic condition encoding ~unction which corresponds to the condition in which the machine is "set" at the moment, and, in the "Clear" position of the key, the machine will perform the automatic clearing and clear encoding functions which returns the machine to normal as desGribed.
Conditioning or clearing is per~ormed automatically following carriage return. When a line is deleted, the sequential conditioning or clearing will unerringly cause proper coordination between the composer and the reproducer.
When a precec~ing line is not deleted, the conditioning or clearing code at the beginning of the next line is not normally necessary, but such a code is of great importance in instances where a tape may be separated (torn off) between lines and , the latter part of the text on the tape is run a second time, - through the main reader. In the latter instance, the re-producer would always be properly coordlnated by the irst code in the ~irst line.

' " , ' '.

.
.

-2~2- _ , ~L~533~7~

36. STOP PRINT~R

- A stop printer.key 2883 (Figs. 3 and 167) is pro-vided prlmarily for encoding a stop printer signal and there-through for stopping the reproducer at the end o~ a piece of work so that the finished copy may be removed and new papar inserted ~or the next job. It may also be used ~or stopping the automatic typing processes of the reproducer withi~ a line, where it is desired to manually lnseFt variabl s (names, addresses, dates, etc. ~or example~ in a plurality of otherwise identical papers that may be reproduced several times in the reproducer or that may be copied by other means.
Upon depression o stop printer key ~883 and com-pletion o~ a .circuit thro~gh contacts 288g and 2~90, a stop printer circuit control mechanism 2896 is caused to operate and to control punching of the stop printer code 5, 6, as .
. will be described. The s~ructural details of mechanism 28~6 are shown ïn Figs~. 168 and 169.
' ~ ' ' , , .

. 37. EXTR~ LINE SPACING
E~CODI~G A~D PLATE~ R~TATING

The line space key 20 (Fig~ 33, and the reverse line space key 21 are operable ~or addi~g and deducting line spac s, respectively, and thus, in this respect they are lor supplementing the normal line spacing tha~ occurs automaticallv .

2~3 - ~5~337~ -upon return of the carriage by lever 111 and as controlled by the preset button 112 as previously described. With each operation of the key 20 or Xey 21, the platen in the composing machine's paper carriage is advanced or reveLsed respectively, on -line space and a fo~ward line space code (4) or reverse line space code (4,5), respectively, is punched on the oontrol tape for causing the corresponding oper~tion o~ the platen ~n the paper carriage o~ the reproducer. It may be noted that there is no longitudinal ~arriage shift in these supplementary line space sequences.

38. DELETING FUNCTIONS

Deletion of functions.generally includes deletion o the particular function code on the control tape, and reversal o~ the function in the composer so the composer is ~eft in the condition i~ was in beore the function was performed and encoded.
Deletion o the line space 4, 5 and bold and regular codes (4, 6, 7 and 5, 6, 7, respectively) is acco~-plished in a manner.similar to that described above with regard to the other delete functions.

. -2~;-, ~i33~4 39. ~APE FEE~ ~YS

Tape feed Xeys 3075 and 3076 (Figs. 3, 175, 176)are operable for automatically ~eedin~ the cont~ol tape through the main punches to pro~ide clear unpun~he~ tape that may be used or pencil or other notations directly on the tape. The additional space on the tape may also be used to indica~e clearly the begin~ing and end of each piece o~ -work, and to make it easier to tear ou~ a piece of work without danger o~ damaging the codes at the beginning and end of the work. Notations on such blank spaces are extremely , .
useul, particularly when filing or identifying separated pieces of tape.
- Such blank space may also be provided within a line at a point where it is desirable to have the reproducer stop for some manual conditioning of the repr~ducer. In such an instance, a tape feed key in the composer may be used, special instructions written ln ~he space and the text continued therea~ter in the usual manner. When this blank tape s introduced in the main reader, the main decoder 22g2 ~Fig. 1~3) is thereore not operated and the reproducer stands idle, and the operator of the reproducer can then read the special instr~ction, perform according to the in~tructions and manually start the eproducer. To ~start the reproducer, the operator will cause the feed-read switch means 2287 to be restored to ., ' ~ ~.IS'- ' .

, .' , ' ' . ' "

~33~

the illustrated position, and he may do this by operating a tape feed key (not shown here) for inducing a momentary current in a known manner into wire 2304, through now closed switch 2298, wire 2305 and solenoid 2301 for operating the solenoid. As describad, operation of solenoid 2301 restores the swi~ch means 2287 for closing its switch 2297 and for thus cycling blank tape through the main reader. After feeding the blank tape, when the next code is read, the solenoid 2286 is energized, and the reproducer is again condi~ oned to resume r3production as controlled by the encoded text.

40. GE~ERAL KEY LOCKS

A general key lock mechanism 3139 ~Figs. 4, 12, 44, 57, 117 and 118) is generally speaking a customary ball type lock arrangement for preventing depression of one keyboard key when any other key is operated.

.'' ' .
'~
41. ~O--PU~ICH OPERATION OF THE M~CHI~E

~ormally the punch control key 602 (Fig. 3) is in ;~
the "punch" position and the punch control relay 603 (Fig. 47) is in normal "on" condition, and the machine is conditioned to operate for encoding text information and justi~ying information and performing automatic ba~k spacing and deleting operations, as previously described herein. However, when ~ ' - .... . .

~5~3'~L

the key 602 (Fig. 3) is shifted forwardly to the "no punch"
position and Ihe relay 603 (Figs. 46, 47) is automatically shifted to "punch off" condition, the machine will not perform ..
any encoding operations, and, of course, it will not perform any automatic deleting operations.
When the machine is in the "punch off" condition, manipulation of the character and space keys will cause normal typing and forward diferential carriage movements in accord-a~ce with the upper-lower case switch means 159 (Fig. 11) and an operated character key 16 or in accordance with a space key as the case may b~ and as described, but the operations will not be encoded by the main punches 161 because the switches 160 and the switch 669 are now shifted as shown in Fig. 48.
Under the "punch off" (no punch) con.dition, depression of the delete key (back space key) 140 (Fig. 15) merely prepares the .. ~
~ machine to operate reversely upon operation of the character ; . and space kevs. . :
Under no punch condition, character and space keys . may be selectively operated and their interposers individually. ~ :
. shifted into the ball-locks at the same time the delete key . .:.
is depressed and.its interposer 3157 i.s effective, since the normally effective interposer 3193 (Fig. 43) is ineffective a~ such times as shown here. ~epression of the delete ~ey a.~so shifts a mechanical means for preventing imprinting of characters .;
on the paper carriage when a character key is operated. In .

,- ' ,,.-' :

...... . . .. . . . .. .. ... . .. .. . ....

lQ533 74 other words, characters wlll not be imprinted when the character keys are operated and the machine is in the no punch back space condition, as ~ill be explained in greatex detail hereinafter.
When the punch control key arran~ement 144 (Fig. 48) is in off condition as shown, the shifted switches 160 and 669 prevent encoding by punches 161 as described, and this also renders ineffective the circuit through wire 163 (Fig. 11), switch 164, wire 165, the end of line tape feed control 166 for preventing this type of tape feeding operaticns that normally occur upon return of the carriage as described, and this also renders ineffective the circuit through wire 167 and the forward tape cycle control 169 for preventing normal tapè shifting through the main punches. ~nen the arrangement 144 is in punch off condition, its switch 670 renders the control for no space at end of justified line commutator 146 ana the mechanism 2306 (Fig. 153) inoperable. In purch off condition, the switch 858 (Fig. 48) is open as described for ` -preventing operation of the ~ord space counter 850 (Fig. 62).
Under punch off condition, the switches 996, 1002 and 1012 (Fig. 48) are shifted for rendering the initial delet~ circuit t ineffective. The reason these three switches are provided for rendering the initial delete circuit ineffective is so that part of this circuit can be made effective during no punch condition . ~-- . ., ,' ''.
... . . . . . . . . . ...... . ., . .. . . ~ . ... .. . .. .. ... . . ... .

~5~374 of the machine as will be explained hereinafter. Under punch off condition, the switch 1099 is shifted for rendering the back space decoder 1095 (Fig. 66) and the back space reader 1097 ineffective. Since the wire 1345 is connected to wire 1098 and thus to switch 1099, the now open switch 1099 also renders the carriage return circuits ineffective and therefore the carriage return circuit breaker 1341 (Fig. 83), the general key lock mechanism 1335, and the end of line tape control 166 and thus the carriage return encoding arrangements are inoperable under the no punch condition. Moreover, since ~ -the wire 2126 is connected to wire 1098 and to switch 1099, the now open swltch 1099 (Fig. 48) renders the justifying p~nch circuits through the dividing and encoding mechanism 1923 (Fig. 92), the justifying punches 2050 and 206~, etc., ineffective under the no punch condition. The now shifted switches 670 and 2456 (Fig. 48) cause the forward and back space circuits to avoid the forward motivating solenoid 2378 (Fig. 153) and the reverse motivating solenoid 2399, respectively, while these switches maintain the carriage moving circuits otherwise effective as described in topic 31 and in connection with Fig. 153.
, . .

-~19~
' : . ': '-... ... ... . . .... ......... . .... . .. ~ . ... .. . :: :

10~33~
~2. PUNCHES--OFF KEY_ LOCKS ~ND BACK ~.
SPACE PRINT PREVE~ITING MEA~S

~ hen the punch..-control key 602 (Fig. 3) is shifted .to its "no.punch" position, the delete key 140 remains operable and the back space release key 1037 is rendered operable by operation or solenoid 3216 (Fig. 15) and pawl 3223.
Operation of the solenoid 3216 and the resulting counterclockwise operation of arm 3222, locks the line delete key 1479 tFig. 3) against operation as seen in E'ig5. 141, 14~.
A~ described previously, the tape return ke~ 138 (Fig. 14) is normally locked against manual operation by stop lever 3175 and the only time key 138 is operable is following deleting operations when the delete key 140 (Fig. 15) i5 auto-matically released and returned, and the interposer 3161 i5 brought up into the position shown in Fig~ 16.. I~ this position of interposer 3161, it holds the release lever 3176 and stop lever 3175 (Fig~. 14) in slock~ise ineffe~tive position and the tape return key 138 may be depressed as described. However, . d~lring no-punch operations, the s~op lever 3175 remains in blocking position for preventing operation of key 138, when the delete key 140 (Fig. 15):is returned by manual operation of ~at:k space release key 1037. . .

, "
C1 0- ~ ~

. . . ' ~.

- .,. . ., .. ... , . ., -,.......................... ~, :

~C~5337~
DESCRIPTION QF REPRODUCER

1 ` . GE~ERAL FI~ME MEP~IBERS

The machine is assembled about a sturdy four-sided base 1' ( Figs . 1 ', 2' and 3'). A centrally located .
transverse T-shaped member 2', in an inverted attitude, is fitted be~ween and it is secured at its ends to the side rails of the base 1'. A standard typewriter frame 8' is assembled on the channel members 6' and 7'~ An auxiliary frame 9' :
(Figs. 3', 4', 5'.and 6'), which supports the mechanism ~or moving the typewriter carriage is mounted on and secured to :
'the typewriter frame 8'. ~ .
An assembly containing an automatic line spacing ; .
control mechanism and several manually operable controls including the carriage return key~mechanism is located to the left of the standard typewriter frame 8' (Figs. 9' and 3'.).
~he mai-n decoder assembly, a top ~iew of which is shown in Fig. 10', is located to the rear of transverse member 2', Fig. 2'. The decoder~assembly's frame consists of 2 forward plate 29' and a rearward plate 30', and several ,, rods which soldily connect the two plates, . A number of cycling control mechanisms are .i:.
ass,embled between a leftside plate'31' and an identlcal right- ,', . side ,?late 32' (Figs. 2' and 3').
' An automatic countlng mechanism which is instrumental in justification of the reproduced lines is mounted on " . , , .

.. ' . , ' . '.' ':~

.. , . , . . ................ , . , . . , . ~ .
., ........... , - . . .. ~ ~,. . ....

~05~3~

ver~ical plate 35' (Figs. 1' and 3') located at the right rear o the machine.
- .

2 ' TYPEWRITER I~ GE~ERAL

A standard o~fice typewriter (Underwood ~5) is selected to illustratively indicate that any commercially developed typewriter may be adapted for use.
The keyboard (FigO 8'), in the illustrated embodi-ments is comprised of a nearly standard arrangement of keys.
Normal character keys 39' are adapted to be actuated for accordingly imprinting the appropriate character and causing the paper carriage to be moved the appropriate letter space amount, which movement being differentially variable and corresponding to the particular character and the upper or lower case condition of the machine.
The shift keys 40' and 41' are arranged and actuat-able in the well known manner for case shifting.
The underline key a2l is actuated for imprinting an underline mark, but does not cause carriage movement as do the other character keys.
The line space key 43' in the tape controlled type~
writer does not cause printing or longitudinal carriage ^~;
mover.lent but is actuated manually ror causing a single step forward line space rotation of the platen. The reverse line ., .''', ~ . . , ,`;,', ' s.'- ;~ , .'',', .: ':
" .. .... . .... . .. . .... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . ... .... . . ..

-- ~533'74 space key 44' is actuated manually ~or causing a single step reverse line space rotation of the platen.
The shift lock 45' is actuated for holding the machine in upper-case condition until a shift key is actuated ~or releasing the lock The character keys 39' and the underline key 42' are carried by key levers 46' (Fig. 11') which, when actuated, operate bell-cranXs 47' and type arms 48' through a well kbown type-actuating arrangement.
A locking means is provided to prevent the bail arrangement from being pivoted out of the lower case position at times when a shift key is not operated. For this provision side member 73' (Fig. 14') extends downwardly in the form of an arm 79', which suppor~s a righ~wardly extending stud 80', The configuration of openin~ 81' provides a blocking surface 86' (Figs. 9' and 14'), which lies in the path of stud 80' when the bail arrangemen~ is in the lower case position and the detent is in its clockwise position. Count~rclock~ise movement of the member 83' and detent 82' raises the blocking surface 86l out of effective position, and only then can the bail arrangement and, therefore, the platen be moved to upper case position. ;
The machine may also ~e shifted to upper case condition by depression of t he shift lock key AS~ (Figs. 14' and 15'). ~ ~ -.
.' ~ '' ., .' 3 _ ' . . . , , . ... , . , . . . , . . . , ~ ~ .. . . . . . . . .. . . .

533~

~he machine is locked in the upper case condition, when the shift lever 66' is moved downward by the shift lock 45'~
The paper carriage is of a well known construction having a generally rectangular shaped transversely movable base carrier 104' (Figs. 1', 2' and 8') and a vertically shiftable platen carrier 105', which is carried by the base carrier.
The carriage is caused to move leftwardly, fGrwardly, by power originating in a carriage moving mechanism, and it is returned to the le~t margin and it may be backspaced upon such manual control of the machine, by spring power (Figs. 21' and 22') when the carriage m~ ing mechanism permits such rightward movement..

"''~, _ 3 ' . CARRIAGE ~OVING MECH~IISM

The carriage moving mechanism is similar to that :
described above for the composer including differential movement of the carriage for providing proportional letter spacing, ` ~
differential word spacing, line justification~ . ;
The mechanism is shown in Figs. 1', 2' and 5'. ~. :
The carriage moving mechanism is assembled on the auxiliary :
frame 9' (Figs. 4' and 5'). .
Cyclic and epicyclic gear me~ns, which constitute .~:
a major part of the carriage moving mechanism, are mounted on . . . ' ' "' ~

-2a~-.
:,~

53379~

a rod 149l (Fig. 6').
The carriage drive gear 154' (Fig. 6') has thirtyteeth and a circular pitch of .100 of an inch. The carriage gear moves the carriage laterally one fourth o~ a tooth or .025" per unit o~ movement and, therefore, 120 units ~f movement per revolution~ The clutch gears 155a' and 156' have 120 teeth or 1 tooth per unit of carriage movement~ With this arrangement, the wide farq clutch gear 1S7-' (Fig. 24') can be disengaged from its gears 155' and 156' in any unit position ~ -of the carriage for return of the carriage to any other unit position, and at which latter position the teeth of the rotated gear 155a' and the unmoved gear 156' are again in alignment for reengagement by the wide faced year 157'. The ^
margin stops are settable for stopping the carriage only in positions dimensionally commensurate with .Q25 of a~ inch, and the entire stop ar~angement is laterally adjustable for causing alignment of the clutch gears, when the carriage is in any of the margin stop positions.
In the illustrated embodiment, the gears in the differentials 205' and 206' (Fig. 6') are all of standard gears and are comprised of only three different sizes. The gears 208', 209', 213' and 214' are of one size, gears 210' and 216' are another size, and gears 211' and 215' are of still another size.

,~

..
-225- !

~ Q533~4 Tha ratchet els 228' and 244' are identical, and ratchet wheel 249' is similar thereto and each of the three ratchet wheels have 120 teeth each. Ratchet wheel 228' is operable two, three or four teeth at a time for causing normal carriage movemènts of two, three or four ~nits, which movements correspond respectively to the differential letter, word and nut spacing. Ratchet wheel 244' is operable from one to twenty-three teeth at a time,'simultaneously with a two teeth operation of wheel 228' for word spacing, fox adding a respective quotient number of units to the normal word spacing for justifying purposes as will be explained herein-after. Wheel 249' is never operated more than one tooth at a time, and is operable for adding one more unit of movement '' ' ' .. .
to that caused by wheels' 228' and 244' for a number of word spaces corresponding to the division remainder. '' For each one tooth operation of any one of the'' -. .
ratchet wheels 228', 244' or 249', the clutch gears 155a' and 156', and the carriage gear 154' are operated 1/120th of a -~
revolution, or one tooth operation of the clutch gears and "~
one unit'rotation of the carriage gear for a unit (.02i") movement of the carriage. '`
The combined transmission and differential gearing - ;
that brings aoubt this propor~.'onal moti'on is accomplished by the interconnected differentlals 205' and 206', which are `
illustratively equipped with gear sizes as follows~
,'~
.

-2~6-. .
~` .

.... , ~ .. ~ .. ,.. .. , , . - - , .

53~ ~
Gears 210' & 216': 32 D~P., 30 teeth, and .9375" P.D.
211' & 215': " " 60 " , " 1.875" "
208',209' ~13' & 2i4': " " 45 " , " 1.40625 From the foregoing list of gear sizes and as can best be seen in Fig. 26', the ratios o the enmeshed gears 208' and 209' are one-to-one; gears 211' and 210' are two-to-one, respectively; gears 213' and 214' are one-to-one, and gears 216' and 215' are one-to-two, respectively.
In Fig. 26', the arrows indicate the direction of rotation of the ratchet wheels and heir connected gear carriers, and the individual gears in a forward direction for advancing the carriage as a line progresses. Rotation in the direction of the arrows will be referred to herein as - ' ' ' .:
being forward and contradirectional rotation will be referred to as reverse, or a reverse direction.
A study of the motion resulting from a one tooth, 1/120th revolution, rotation of ratc'net wheel 249' will be discussed first. In the ~nterest of c~ rity and for e~sier ~;~
understanding, it will be considered that the ratchet wheels are operated only independently, in other words, when one ratohet wheel is operated the others remain stationary.
When wheel 249' is rotated 1/120th of a revolution, gear 216' is also rotated 1/120th of a revolution. Since gear ~ -215' is meshed with gear 216' and it is twice the diameter O~ r .~
,~:

.. ' ' ' ~ 0~33~
gear 216', gear 215' and gear 214' affixed thereto are rotated half as much as or l/?40th of a revolution about their common axis. Gear 213' is meshed with gear 214' of the same size and it is! therefore, also rotated l/240th o~ a revolution about its own axis. Since gears 213' and 211' are connected for rotation together, gear 211' is also rotated 1/240th of a revolution. Gear 211' being twice the size of the inter-meshed gear 210', rotates gear 210' twice as much or, in other words, l/120th of a revolution. The l/120th revolution o~ gear 210', through the gear 209' connected for rotation therewith, ; ~ -drives gear 208', which is the same size as 209', l/120th revolution. Since gear 208' and clutch gear 156' are connected for ro~tion together, the clutch gears are ro~ ted counter~
clockwise l/120th of a revolution, which is the amount and ;
direction the clutch gears are rotated to cause a single unit of carriage movement, as previously explained~
When the ratchet wheel 244' is rotated one tooth, l/120th OL a revolution, t'ne year carrier of differen~ial 206' is rotated therewith. I~ it were not ~or the epicyclic rotation of gears 215' and 214', the gear 213' would be rotated 1/120th of a revolution fo~ardly with the carrier.
However, since gear 215' is moved bodily about relatively staticiLary gear 216' and since gear 215" is twice the size of gear 216', the gear 215' and the connected gear 214' are rotated l/240th of a revolution in the reverse direction about ..
.~ :
'. ' .
-2~8-., ., , , . ., . . . :

3'7~

their own axis. Since the carrier is moved forwardly 1/120th of a revolution and gear 214' is rotated reversely 1/240-th of a revolution, the enmeshed gear 213' is rotated forwardly only the remaining l/240th of a revolutionO Since the gear 213' is rota~ed forwardly 1/240th of a revolution for one tooth operation of ratchet wheel 244' and since the gear 213' is rotated fo~ardly 1/240th of a revolution for one tooth operation o~ ratchet wheel 249' as previously explained, this forward 1/240th of a revolution is transmitted through the dif erentia~ 205' in the same manner as for the one unit oparation o~ wheel 249', as previously described, for rotating ~-the clutch gears and carriage gear forwardly for moving the carriage forwardly one unit.
When the ratchet wheel 228' is rotated forwardly one tooth, l/120th of a revolution clockwise in the direction of the arrGw, the gear carrier of dlfferential 205' is rotated therewith. If it were not for the epicyclic rotation of the Colnpanion gears 210' and 209', the gear 208' would be rotated 1/120th of a revolution clockwise with -the carrier. However, since gear 210' is moved bodily about the relatively stationary gear 211i and since gear 210' is half the size of gear 211', the gear 210' and the connected gear 209' are rotated 1/60th o a r~olution forwardly about their own axis. Since the carrier is moved l/120th of a revolution clockwise, which is reverse in respect to the rotation of gear 208', and since -2~9-5337~
gear 209' is rotated forwardly 1~60th of a revolution, the enmeshed gear 208' is rotated ~orwardly 1/120th of a revolution~
the other 1/120th of a revolution of gear 208' being counter~
a cted by the contradirectional rotation of the carrier. Thus it is seen that the gear 208' is rotated 1/120th of a xevolu-tion forwardly for each one tooth forward operation o f ratchet wheel 228', the same as it is moved for each corresponding ope ration of ratchet wheels 244' and 249' as previously explained. Also, as previously explained, 1/120th of a revolution of gear 208' results in the same rotation of the clutch gears and the carriage gear 154' for moving the carriage one unit or .025 of an inch.
Since, as just explained, the carriage is moved one unit for a one tooth operation of any one of the ratchet wheels, it can be understood that a multiple tooth operation of any one ratchet wheel will result in the same number of units movement of the carriage and that the result of the operation of onc ratchet wheel will be added to the r~sult o simuitaneous operation of another or others of t he ratchet wheels. It should also be understood that simultaneous operation of more than one ratchet wheel will cause a single movement of the carriage equal in u~its to the number of teeth acaumulated on the operated ratchet wheels.
The ratchet wheel 228' is provided for operating the carriage moving mechanism to shift the carriage~appropriately -'.".

-2~,0- ;
., , . . ~,~ .
',, , ~.. . , . , .. .... . . -- - . ' .

~ 5~3~
~or the various si2e characters and spaces. The wheel 228' is normally held from Fotating, primarily for preventing the carriage from moving i~ the return direction under tension of the carriage return spring previously described.
The wheel 228' may be rotated clockwise, in the direction of the arrow "F" (Fig. 29'), 2, 3 and 4 teeth at a time for causing the corresponding 2, 3 and 4 units (.050'', .U75" and .100'') normal forward movements of the carriage, and it is so operated appropriately ~or these differential letter and word spaces, whether the reproducing machine is ~ontrolled automatically by the control tape or it is controlled by manipulation of the keyboard keys as will be described.
When the machine is being operated manually, the wheel 228' ~
may also be controlled to permit the carriage return spring ~;
to shift the carriage differentially reversely 2, 3 and ~ units during back spacing operations as will be described~later.
The structure of the mechanism ~or holding, and for rotating the ratchet wheel 228' clockwise during rorward operations will now be described.
Operation of solenoid 267' (Fig. 29') pulls link 266' rightwardly, and th;s rotates the bellcrank 263', moves the pawl 261' and rotates the wheel 228' clockwise about the axis of rod 149'. The clockwise movement o~ pawl 261' .s limited by its engagement with a stop 269', 270'or 271' for - -2~
.... .

.,, .. . ., ., .,, . .. , - . , -, "

~ 33'~ ~
terminating the clockwise rotation of wheel 228' at the equivalent of a 2, 3 or 4 teeth extent, respectively.
When the solenoid 267' is operated to drive the pawl 261' and wheel 228' t'ne equivalent of two teeth on the wheel, the stop 269' is effective and the surface 277' is stopped thereagainst while the surface 278' latches under the edge of the stop ~or adding the inertla of the stop and the tension of its sprin~ 273' to the tension of the spring 264' for preventing overrotation of the wheel beyond two teeth movement.
At times, the soleno~d 267' is operated for rotating the wheel 228' two teeth for advancing the carriage two units (.050" j following imprinting of two unit characters and at other times for providing a two unit word or nut space, as the case may be, and, at such times the wheel and pawl 261' `- -are stopped by stop 269' as described. When a three unit (.075") character or nut space is provided, the solenoids 267' and 280' are operated together. In this second instance, the solenoid 267' operates wheel 228' as described, and the solenoid 280' pulls link 279' and rotates the two unit stop `~
269' counterclockwise to its ineffective position against tension of spring 273'. In this second instance, the pawl 261' drives the wheel 228' thr~e units and it i5 stopped against stop 270'. In a third instance, the solenoid 267' is operated to drive the wheel 228' forwardly four teeth ~,.

- ~3~- :
.. ' - , ., :: .
.
. . . ... . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . ... . . ... . . . . ..

~ s~
for a ~our unit carriage movement, and, at the same time, the solenoid 282' is operate~ to render both stops 269' and 270' ineffective. In this third instance, the pawl 261' is stopped against the stationary stop 271' for limiting the rotation of the wheel 228' to four teeth (four units). When the solenoid 282' is operated, it pulls link 281' for rotating the stop 270' counterclockwise, and by the stud 283' on the stop 270' the stop 269' ls moved together with the stop 270' to the cQu~terclockwise ineffective position. In each of the above instances, the detent 255' ratchets over the teeth of the w'neel 228~ for holding the wheel in its final position when tne solenoid 267' is deenergized. Upon deenergization of solenoid 267', the pawl 261' ratchets counterclockwise while spring 264' returns the bellcrank 263' to the 1llustrated normal position. Following respective operations according to the second and third instances above, the solenoid 280' is de~nergized to ~ermit the spring 273' to restore stop 269' to erfective position, and tne solenoid 2~2' is deenergized to permit springs 273' and 274' to restoxe the stops 269' and 270' respectively, cloc]swise to their effective positions agaihst stud 276' as shown~ !
In order to properly continue the sequences that include "
the three operational instances described in the preceding paragraph, a switch means 284' is provided for signaling ~he instant that the solenoid 267' completes its operation of shifting the pawl 261' against the first effective stop.
., . . , ~

-2~3-33~

The contacts 290' and 291' are the only pair that is effective when the motivating solenoid 267' is operated alone. The contac~s 292' and 293' are the only pair that is effective when the solenoids 267' and 280' are operated together. Contacts 294' and 295' are the only pair that is ef~ective when the solenoids 267' and 282' are operated together. Therefore, current will p~ss through the blade 286' and the effective pair of contacts 290', 291'; 292', 2~3', or 294', 295' as soon as the wheel 228' has been shifted forward two,three or four units, respectively, in a normal forward cycle of operations.
The ratchet wheel 2~4' (Fig. 26') is operable for-wardly only and it is operated ~or justif~ing purposes only.
In this particular embodiment, wheel 244' is operated ;
:. .
simultaneously with wheel 228', only when the wheel 228' is operated for forward word spaces and only when the reproducer is operated automatically according to precoded information on the contxol tape. In this embodiment, the ju.stifying amounts are added to word spaces only. The first code for a line may be a quotient code, and such a quotient code will cause the control mechanism to be set ~or controlling the wheel 244' (Fig. 30') to add the quotient amount (number of units) ~;
to word spaces in that line. ~lhen the control mechanlsi.~ is set to a position representi~g one or more units and the reproducer .. . .. .
;, -2~4- -' , '" :.

... .. . . . , . .. ... . . . . .. ... ~ . ... .

1~:)5337~ ~
is operated according to a wrod space code, the wheel 244' is operated ~or adding the number of units that correspond to the quotient of the amount left over in the unjustified line on the composer divided by the number of word spaces in that line, to the word space for justifying purposes in the reproducer.
The control mechanism for limiting the number of teeth (number of units) extent of the operations o~ the wheel 244' will now be described. An adjustable stop member 335' is pivoted on the sleeve spacer 243' (Fig. 6') concentrically with ha a~is of rod 14g! and wheel 2~4' (Fig. 30').
When the solenoid 339' (~ig. 30') is energized, it pulls link 340' and rotates the stop member 335' counterclockwise to one of twenty-three operated positions. Twenty two stop solenoids 341', with respective suffix numbers 1-22 correspond to the first twenty two operated positions of the stop member ~ -335'. Upon operation of a solenoid 341', its respective stop 342' is extended forwardly into blocking alignment with Founterclockwise movement of member 335' for stopping the member in the respective operated position. Upon deenergization of a solenoid 341', its stop 342' is withdrawn to ineffective position.
Upon completion of a line and return of the carriage, the solenoid 352' is energized. However, upon operation of sol-enoid 352', the solenoid pulls link 351' and rotates pawl 348' counterclockwise against a rod 370'. Rod 370' is secured - , ' ' '~
-2~5-. :

, - .. , ;, : .. ,, -.

~5;~3~

on and extends between the plate 231' (Fig. 29') and the ~ ;
plate 246' (Fig. 30'), Counterclockwise rotation of pawl 348' releases stud 347', and permits the spring 358' to rotate me~ber 353', stud 347' and locking pawl 344' to ineffective position against rod 370'. Disengagement of pawl 344' ~rom teeth 345' permits the spring 336' to restore the stop member 335' clockwise to th~ illustrated normal position against rod 338', Thus, the stop memher 335' is restored to normal position, and the locking pawl 344' is disengaged so that the member 335' may again be set counter-cloc~ise for an ensuing line. Return of the carriage may cause khe control tape and the codes for an ensuing line to be fed Lnto the main readerl and the first code for the new line may be a quotient code. When a quotient code is read and the main decoder is operated accordingly, the solenoid 339' is operated together with a stop 342' ( 1-22) or it may be operated alone, for rotating the member 335' a number of incxements from one to twenty-two, or to twenty three, respectively, as described, for setting the member in a particular quotient representing position. When the member 335' is thus positioned, a switchLng means is effective for ~ ~-completing th~ setting sequences.
When the solenoid 35i' is operated, it pulls Link .;
35~', rotates member 353' clockwise and by tension of strong spring 354' the locking pawl 344' is engaged with teeth 345' `''''' -2~6- ~ç
. . .

- - ~ - . . . . . . ..... . ..... . . . . .

~53374 ,.;

for locking the member 335' in operated position. As soon as pawl 344l is shifted to locking position, the pawl 348' is shifted to the illustrated latching position. When the pawl 344' is stopped by teeth 345', the member 353' i3 rotated a bit further by ~olenoid 357' against tension of spring 354' for closing the switch 361'. When the member 353' is rotated clockwise sufficiently to assure full engage-ment of switch 361 ', the pawl 363' latches counterclockwise over stud 362 ', under tension of spring 365', for permitting the switch 369' to open, and for latching member 353' in operated position and thereby holdLng switch 361' closed.
The opening of reader control circuit switch 369 ' breaks the main reading circuit and thereby deenergizes the main ~decoder which then deenerg~æec the solenoid 339', any operated~stop =olenoid 341' and the solenoid 357'. Breaking ^
of the main reading circuit causes the quotient code to be fed out of the main reader and completion of this tape ~eeding operation causes a circuit that runs through the now closed switch 361 ' and the solenoid 367' to be completed. Thus, the solenoid 367' is operated to pull link 366' and rotate pawl 363 ' clockwise for closing switch 369 ' and for releasing stud 362 ' . Closure of switch 369' remakes the main reading circuit for reading the next code in the line. The release of stud 362' permits springs 354 ' and 358' to return the member 353' counterclockwise against the stud 347' for permitting the ' -237- ;
::`

~ S3~
switch 361' to open and to thereby deenergize the solenoid 367'. -In the just described manner, the stop member 335' may be rotated and locked in an~operated position correspond-.. . . . . . .
ing to a quotient code, and tape handling and main reading circuitry is controlled by completion of the stop setting ope~ tions.
The manner in which the wheel 244' may be rotated for adding a predetermlned justlfying quotient amount to each normal word space will now be described.
When the member 335' (Fig. 30') is set in a counter-clockwise quotient representing position (1 - 23) as described, . .
operation of solenoid 375' pulls link 375', rotates member r, `I

377' and the pawl 378' rotates the wheel 244' counterclockwise (forwardly as described) a number of teeth corresponding to the quotient amount. At the end of this motion, the pawl `

378' engages the stud 381', and the surace 382' in cooperation '~
. .:
with thq stud 381' prevents overrotation of the wheel 244' beyond the quotient representing amount.
When the wheel 244' is rotated the quotient amount, as just described, a switch means is closed to signal the compietion of-that operatlon. i ;, When the stop member 335' is rotated and locked in a counterclockwise quotient representing position, the blades 384' and 385~ are shi~ted with the stop member the same amount - . '.~

-238- ~

- - . .. , .. , ~ ~ .. .. .. . .. .

1~ii337~
away from the conductor 383'. Thereafter, during reproduction of the line, when the solenoid 375' is operated to add the quotient amount to the hormal line space as described, the conductor 383' will engage the blades 384' and 385' at about the time the wheel 244' is operated the quotient amount and the drive pawl 378' is stopped against the stud 381'. Thus, as soon as wheel 244' is operated the quotient amount, the conductor 383' is engaged with the blades 384' and 385'. When this occurs, a circuit is complete through the conductor 391', blade 386', blade 384', conductor 383', blade 385', wire 388', bla~e 387' and conductor 392' for signalling the completion of the operation and ~or continu.ing the sequences of the operation as will be explained later.
Operation of solenoid 397' (Figs. 30' & 7') pulls llnk 3q8l, rotates member 399', moves drive pawl 400' and rotates wheel 249' counterclockwise, while the detent 405' ratchets one tooth. At the end o~ one tooth rotation of wheel 249', the stud 403' stops the pawl 4~0' and the wheel 249l in operated position. When the solenoid 397' is deenergized, the ,~
spring 402' restores the drive mechanism ~enerally c1ockwise to the illustrated normai position where the member 399' is stopped against the rod 338'. The solenoid 397' is operated simultan-eously ~-ith the solenoid 267'~Fig. 29') for a~ding one unit to the normal two unit word space, re~pectively, as will be `
described later.

. .

.
, .. . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . ... .

~ ~33~
4'~ STRUCTURE IN THE_MAIN READ_R CIRCUIT

As described above many of the components in the Composing Machine are used in the reproducer apparatus.
Primed numerals are used to designate the reproducer parts and figures while nonprimed numerals are used for the composer portion of this application. Correlation between the primed and unprimed numeral designations fo~ the same parts will be made for the first occurrence of the primed numeral.

..

~ L~ _ ==d~r The main reader 407' (Fig. 31') is comprised primarily of seven channel related sensing springs 410' (2220 of Fig~ 38) that are arranged to individua11y sense a common conductor plate 411' (2227 of Fig. 38) through any aligned channel related code punch holes on a control tape 412' (577 of Fig. 38) that is shiftable therethrough. When no code punch holes are ~
align~d with the sensing springs 410', the tape insulates the ~ ~;
sensing springs ~rom the plate 411'.
' ,' .' ~. .

b. Slack Tape Sensinq Means EncOded-tape is accumulated in a loop 413' (2074 . ;.
of Fig. 38), ready for reproducing purposes. When a loop 413' is formed, the slack tape sensing means 409' closes a switch 414' (2278 of Fig. 67j, whereupon the reproducing machine may . , :

O

~.

... . ... . .... . .. . . . . . . . . . .

37~
operate accordins to the codes in the loop. When the loop 413' is eliminated, by completion of the work in the reproduc-ing machine, the tape is drawn down and the slack tape sensing means 409' opens the switch 414' for delaying further oper~tion of the reproducing machine, until further material is encoded by the composing machi~ and the new material is fed into the loop.

c. Main Reader Tape Feed Mechanism The main reader's tape feed mechanism 408' is com-prised primarily of a rotatable ratchet wheel and sprocket means 415' that is operable for advancing the tape 412' one code space increment per operatio~ in the direction or the arrow, and this tape eed mechanism also includes a drive pawl 416'(2244 of Fig. 55~, a cocking solenoid 417' (2240 of Fig~ 55), and a pair of normally closed switches 418' and 419' (2257 of Fig. 55). The arrangement is such that, ~pon operatiQn t of solenoid 417', the pawl 416' is ratcheted one tooth on the ratchet wheel of the means 415', and the switches 418' and 419' are snapped open at the end of the stroke. Upon deenergization of solenoid 417', a return spring 420' (2243 of Fig. 55) returns the dri~7e pawl 416' for rotatinq the ratchet wheel and sprocket means 415' one tooth clockwise and thereby feeding the control tape 412' one step orward, and the spring 420'~also returns ; -2 .' ' .. .. ~. . ... .. . . .. .. .... . . ... ,... . .. ~ . :,. .

37~

the mechanism 408' for closing the switches 418' and 419' at the end of the-return stroke. From the foregoing, it can be understood that, upon energization of solenoid 417', the switches 418' and 419' are opened, and that, upon deenergization of solenoid 417', the pawl 416' and means 415' advance the taep 412' one step forward and the switches 418' and 419' are again closed.

,~: ' ,' d. Automatic Feed-Read Switch Means A feed-read switch means 4~1' (2287 of Fig. 143) .. .
will now be described. Blank (uncoded) space is provided on ;~
the controi tape between the j~stifying codes at the beginning of a line of encoded information and the first text code of the line, and also blank space is providei on the control tape between a carriage return code at the end of the line and the first code for an ensuing line. Thus, the word "feed", o the feed-read switch means, refers to the condition where the tape feed mechanism 408' must be controlled to feed consecu-tive steps of blank tape. Similarly, the word "read" refers to the condition where the main reader 407' reads a code and the operations of the tape feed mechanism 408' must be coordinated with the performance or the reproducing machine as controlled by consecutive codes on the tape.

. .
. . ', ~ ~' .

-2y2- ;

': :
,, ,-.. :

. . . . . . . : :

~33~4 Operation of the "read" solenoid 422' (2286 o~
Fig. 143) shifts the insulators 423'and 424' (2294 and 2295 of Fig. 143) rightward, for opening switch 42Z' and permitting switch 42i' (2297 and 2298 of Fig. 143) to close, respectively.
~hen switches 426' and 427' are fully shifted, as just descxibed, the spring 430' (2300 of Fig. 143) shifts the latch means 428' (2297 o~ Fig. 143) into effecti~e position for holding the insulators 42~3' and 424' and switches 426' and 427' in shifted position.
The latch means 428' may hold the mechanism in ope~ated position throughout a number of consecutive reading cycles. However, following reading of a justifying code or a carriage return code and the resulting operation of the composing machine, the "feed" solenoid 431' is energized. ;~
Operation o~ solenoid 431' pulls link 432' and rotates the , - latch means 428' against tension-of spring 430' to release the insulator 4~3'. Whereupon, the spring 425' restores the armature of solenoid 422' and the insulators 423' and 424~1eft--ward for opening the switch 427' and permitting the switch 426' to close, as shown.

:: ~
,, e. Main Reader Control Key -A reader control key 433' (Figs. 8' and 31') is shiftable from the illustrated normal rearward "start" position ~ ~
, ' ~.
- . ::
..
-2~3-..
.. , ;` .

., .... . . . . . ... . . .. - . - . .-. -- ~ .
, ~ .: . .. . . , , ~ .. ,, . ,. , . :

~(3533~4 to a forward "stop" position for manually terminating the main reading processes, and thereby stopping code controlled operations of the reproducing machine. Provision is also made for automatically shifting the key 433' to the "stop"
position in response to a stop-printer code on the control tape.
Paper may be changed in the paper carriage of the reproducing machine, and also the reproducing machine may be operated manually for adding personalized names, addresses, etc., in a code controlled form letter or for operating the reproducing ;~
machine as an ordinary typewriter, when the reader control key is in thc "stop" position. ~nen the machine is read~ for further code controlled operations (for example, new paper is properly inserted in the carriage and the left margin stop is set to locate the column), the operator may return the reader control key 433' to the "start" position for initiating reader controlled operations.
The reader control key 433' (Figs. 9' and 32') is pivoted on a bolt 434' that is secured on the frame plate 19' and its operation is seen therein.
A bell 439' ~Fig. 32') ls sounded whenever the key 433' is shifted to "stop" position. This audible sisnal indicates that the machine has stopped reproduci~g operations. ~ ~

'' ::
,-:
;
- . --2~4-, ~533'7~
~. Cycling Control ~Iechanisms Three reader control circuit switches a53~, 454~
and 455' (E~ig. 31') are included in a cycling control assembly that is supported between the parallel left and right side plates 31' and 32' (Fig. 2'). A first bank of cycling control mechanisms are arranged side by side as indicated in FigO 37' and as viewed from line 37'-37' (Fig. 2'). A second bank of cycling control mechanisms are similaxly arranged a~ indicated in Fig. 38' and as viewed from line 38'-38' (Fig. 2'~, but the ~;
mechanism in Fig. 38', as it is situated in the machine, is turned around in Fig. 38' so that the left side plate 31' is on the right of the view and the right side plate 32' is on the left.
Each cycling control ~echanism is provided for controlling the sequences of operations that are necessary to -~
perform a distinct type of ~unction in the reproducer. `~-rrhe first bank of cycling control mechanisms are -mounted on or a~.out stationary rods 456' (Fig. 2'), 457', 458', .:, . .
459' and 460' that are secured on an~ extend between the plates 31' and 32' (Fig. 37').
'. ~'. ":

' ~

', ~' . ';
: .
:, ' :,",'~ ':

-2~5- ; ;

. .

~5;~3 ~4 SUl~ARY

As described above, the present invention is concerned with a justifying, composing and reproducing apparatus including text information encoding means 567 (Fig. 38), justifying information encoding means 2046, 2047, a storage medium 577 in which the information is encoded and stored, a rep~oducer means including a main reader 2220 for decoding the information on a storage maans and means for directly supplying the information encoded on the storage means from the composer to the rèproducer.
As is apparent in the invention, the justifying information coding means 2046, 2047 for encoding justifying information correspondlng to a certain amount of text information stores the justifying inormation with respect to space in front of the correspondlng encoded text information. The composer apparatus is abie to encode the text and justifying in~ormation line by line. The justi~ylng informa~ion althouyh encoded after the text information is read out before the text information in order to set up the line to be justified in the reproducer machine. The apparatus further includes :
medium feeding means 739, 2185 for automatically shifting the medium in the encoded information thereon into a reader serving area 2074, sensing means 2261 for sensing entry of encoded medium into the area, a second medium feeding means 2232 -.

-2y6 . ..... ~ .
.. . ' .' ~ .
.`~ .

., , . ~

331~

responsive to the sensing means or shifting the encoded medium from the area into a reproducing reader 2220, whereby the reader automatically controls reproducing apparatus to reproduce . i the ~ncoded text in justified form.

. ' ' '' . . ~

,~ ' , ~ .: . .

;: .
' : ' ' , ''':

.

, . . ~ .
.~

,.... .' . ~" ' s~3~7g~
h. Main Decoder The main decoder 494' is provided for initiatlng automatic operational sequences of the reproducer as controlled by the codes on the tape that are sensed by the main reader 407'.
The main decoder 494' is shown particularly in Figs. 47', 48', 49' and 10', and it is shown schematically in Fig~ 50'. The dacoder is housed generally between the plates 29' and 30' (Figs. 2' and 10').
Upon the reading of a number "1" code channel and consequent energiæation of solenoid 495' ~Fig. 50'), its armature and insulator 496' (Fig. 48') are retracted for disengaging the blade "a" from blade "b" and engaging it with a blade "c"
of the switch. Thereafter,- the insulator is stopped in .~
operated position against.a stud 499'. Upon deenergization ;~-of the solenoid., the blade "a" returns the armature and insulator ~.
to normal position, and it disengages from blade "c" and reengages with blade "b".
Motivating solenoids 500' - 505' (Fig. 50'), which are relative to code channels "2" - "7", .respectively, are provided for operating respective groups of switches 506' - 511'.
The: structure of solenoid 505' and its switches is here selected as exemplary of t.he other solenoids.
Upon operation of solenoid 505' the armature extension ~
512' (Fig. ~9') and its insulators 517' (Figs. 47' & 49') are -.

.
- a48~

... . . ~ .. .. . . . , .. , . .. . .. ... . ..... . . , . ~ . .. . .... , . . . ~ .. . . . ... .... . .. . . .
- - ,; . . - .. ~ . .
. -~5~3~9L
shifted leftward for shifting the free ends of all blades "a"
of switches 511' (~ig. 50') out of engagement with the blades "b" and into engagement with blades "c" of these switches.
Upon deenergization of the solenoid 505', the spring 522' (Fig. 49') returns the armature extension 512' and the insulators 517' thereon to normal position, and by the predisposed tension of blades "a" they disengage from blades "c" and reengage the blades "b" as shown. ~ ;
The main decoder assembly is comprised of seven sections which correspond to the seven channels of the control tape. When a punch hole or a plurality of punch holes that form one code is read by the main reader 407' (Fig. 31'), the corresponding section or sections of the decoder, respectively, are operated to complete a circuit for accomp}ishing a particular function. 2 As shown in Fig. 50', there is one switch 4g7' in the "1" code channel section, there are two switches 506' for the "2" c~de channel, four switches 507' for the "3" coda .~hannal, eight switches 508' for the "4" channel, sixteen switches 509' ~or the ';5" channel, thirty switches 510' for the "6" channel, and there are forty two of the previously described switches -511' for the "7" channel section of the main decoder system of switche~0 , - a49- `

., ,.:-: ' ...
,`.' "~' '' ''':
, . . .. .

3'~4 5 ' . M~IN READE:E~ CI:RCUIT

When the reader control key 433' (Fig. 31') is in the "start" position and the control tape 412' is advanced to a point where one or more of the sensing springs 410', of the main reader 407', make contact with the conductor plate 411' through code punch holes in the tape, the main decoder is operated by the main reader circuit.
When the reader control key 433' is shited to "start" and the main reader-407' senses a code, the main reader circuit is effective for operating solenoid 417' to cock tape feed mechanism 408' in preparation for an ensuing step of the control tape for operating the "read" solenoid 422" to cond~ion feed-read switch means 421' for consecutive reading operations and fo~ operating the main decoder 494' according to the code on the tape. The reproducer is thus conditioned for reading operations and control of the tape and the decoder is operated for initiating a sequence of operations according to a particular code. -During a decoder initiated sequence of operations, one of the switches 453', 454', 455', 369', 1~2' or 492' will be opened for brea~ing the main reader circuit. When this occurs, the solenoid 417' is deenergized and the tape feed mechanism 408' shifts the contrcl tape 412' fo~ardly one step to remove the just read code and to normally shift an ensuing code into the main reader 407'. At the same time, the "read"

-2~ ~

, .. .... . . ... . .. ... .. . .... . ... . . .. . . . . . .. .

~ 05;33~7~
solenoid 422' is deenergized, but the switch means 421' is held in read condition by the latch means 428', unless the previous code were for a justifying or for a carriage return code.
When the reader circuit is broken, the operated motivating solenoids in the decoder 494' are deenergized and the decoder is restored. Upon completion o the deco~er initiated sequence of operations, the switch that was opened to break the main reader circuit is again closed automatically for making the main reader circuit again effective for reading the ensuing code.
" ;' ~, ' 6' MAI~ DECODER, CH~RACTER CIRCUITS
. - _ - .:

- The circuits for automatically operating character keys, as controlled by the decoder, will now be described, by way of illustration.
Normally, when the decoder is operated according to the code "2,4,5" and the decoder motivating solenoids 500', 502', and 503' (Fig. 50') are operated for shifting the decoder switches ,~
505', 508' and 509' respectively, the "7" character key clrcuit is effective. When this circuit is effective, current travels .. .
from source and switch 541' (Fig. 51'j, through wire 542', : .
resistor 543', normally effective brushes 544' and 546', wire .
547', the solenoid 548' for ope;ating the "7' key 39', its wire 551', its normally effective brushes 552' and 554', the wire ,, "7 (2,4,5)", the decoder terminal "~7 Char. (2,4,5)" (Fig. 50') '`'' .:
?s l_ . ~

. .

... . .. .. . . . . . ~ .. . . . ,, .. ... , . , . . . . , .. , . . . -.. . . ~ .. . .. . . . .

- - -the related switch 511' in normal position, a switch S10' in normal position; a switch 509' in operated position, an operated switch 508', a''switch 5~7' in normal condition, an . .. :
operated switch 506', the switch 497' in normal condition, :
wire 527', and the circuit goes to ground through the switches '~
526' that are in normal condition (in this instance, throuyh the switches 526' that remain closed in the "6" and "7" code ' sections)~ .

7'. C~CLI~G CO~T ROL FOR CHARACTERS_ When a character key representing code is read and the decoder is operated accordingly, the corresponding character ~. .
key is operated. When such a key is operated sufficiently to . '';
cause printing of either the upper case character or the key ;;
related lower ca~e character on the paper carriaga, a switch ..
5:55' (Fig. 11'~ under thekey is closed by a conductor.556', that' i5 carried by the'-key lever, to cause a sequence of operations that includes proper carriage movement for the width of the char-acter, depending on the upper or lower case condition of the '.
machine at that moment.
. Since the machine involves differential carriage movement and since the upper case charac.ter width may be '~
different from that of the'lower case character width for a .
given character key, the sequence of operations controlled by .
. ~, .~

., . . ' ' .
.

..... .. , ., ... .... . . . .. . .. .. .. , . ... . ..... .. _,.. . .. . .. ... . .. .

~L05;~3~A
closure of a swit~h 555' also include~ an upper-lower case condition control o~ the carriage movement for the particular character. The precise carria~e movement for each character is shown in "CHART A" that may be found immediately following the Figure Descriptions hereinbefore.
The solenoids 565t, 566' and 567' (Fig. 52') are pro~ided for operating respective 100", 075" and 050"
cycling mechanisms that are provided for breaking the main readi~g circuit and for co~trollin~ the carriage moving mechan-ism to move the carriage a corresponding amount suitable ~or the imprinted character.
Upon operation of a key in group "A" (Chart A), the switch 555' (Fig. 52') (here represented by the switch 555' under the "M", "m" key) under the~key is closed for operating ~e solenoid 565' in the .100" cycling mechanis~. In this particular instance, the circuit originates in a source (S) ~ -an~ switch 541', travels through wire 564', sole~oid 565', '~
~ .
wire 568', blades 569' and 571', wires 578' and 584', and goes `~
to ground through the switch 555' under the ope!rated key, here exemplified by the "M" key. Thus, the solenoid 565' is ;~
.;.
operated each time a character in group "A" (Chart A) is imprinted.
From the above, it can be understood that operation of a character key and the upper-lower case condition of the ` machine wil~ determine the character that is imprinted, and - ' , .

~53 .. .
.

33~
generally the operation of the key and the upper-lower case condition of the switch means 493' will control operation of the one of the cycling control solenoids 565', 566' or 567' that corresponds with the size of the imprinted character.
Energization of the solenoid 565' (Fig. 39'), upon the imprinting of a 100" character pulls link 604' and rotates the cocking member 605' counterclockwise against rod 458'.
~ear the end of the counterclockwise operation of member 605', the end of pawl 607' is urged down into a notch 612' in the end o~ mem~er 605' by spring 609'. At this point, the mechanism, is said to be cocked.
Upon cocking of the mechanism and as the pawl 607~
pivots down into the notch 612', the pawl 607' pushes the bail 473' and insulator 472' downward against tension of spring 479' for opening the reader circuit switch 453'. The opening of switch 453' (Fig. 31') breaks the reader circuit and thus deenergizes the code controlled motivating solenoids in the main decoder 494' for normalizin~ the deco~er. When the decoder .
494' (Fig. 51') is normalized, the cixcuit through the operated character key solenoid 548' is broken or permitting return of the operated key. When the operated normal 100"~ 075", ox .050" character key 39' begins to return, its respective switch 555' (Fig. 52') is opened, for deenergizing the respective (operated) 100", 075" or .050" cycling mechanism solenoid 565', 566' or 567' as the case may be.

.

,, . - . ' .
.

.

. .. ... .......

37~ ~
. . .
Upon deenersiza~ion o~ a cycling mechanism solenoid (565', Fig. 39', for example), the relatively strong spring 606' returns the cocked memher 605' clockwise and thereby pushes the engaged pawl-607l rightward against the tension of lighter spring 609' for rotating the member 608' cloc~wise and thereby pushing its insulator 610' against the switch 611' to close the switch. Thusl the example 100" cycling mechanism is oparated to close its switch 611' tFig. 52').
Clsoure of one switch 611' causes the carriage moving mechanism to move the carriage forwardly appropriately for the . . .
imprinted character.

8'._ SPACES CO~TROLLED BY CODE
1. .

The code controlled .050" nut space operations will ..~ ...-. ~: . . .
be discussed as illustrative. A wire 630' ~FigO 53') is connected between the wire 575' and the main decoder 494' When the main reader 407' ~Fig. 31') senses the ~050" Nut Space code 3, 4, 6 and the main decoder 494' (Fig. 53') is operated accordingly, a circuit is completed from source ~S) and switch 541', wLre 564', the solenoid 567' for cocking the ,O50" cycling mechanism, the wire 575', wire 630' and the circuit goes to ground through the operated decoder.
Operation of the solenoid 567' cocks its respective cycling '~
mechanism and thereby opens the r~ader control circuit switch 453' ~Fig. 31') for deenergizing the motivating solenoids in ' .' ' . .
' ~ ..
~5~ - `
,- .. ''' ;'. :.
'..
. ,., . ... ..... , - ---- - - ..

r the decoder 494' and ~or deenergizing the solenoid 417' in the main reader tape feed mechanism 408'. Thereupon, the mechanism 408' feeds the tape 412' forwardly one step to shift the just read code out o the reader 407' and at the same time to shift the ensuing code into the reader. When the decoder-494' (Fig. 53' ~ is normalized, the operated solenoid 567' is deenergized for per~nitting its cycling mechanism to ope rate and to close its switch 614', Closure of the switch 614' causes the carriage moving mechanism to move the carriage forwardly .050", by the circuit that runs from source (S) and switch 541', wire 615', mo~civating solenoid 267', wire 616', now closed switch 614', and to ground through wire 617'. As soon as the -whee~ 228' is moved two and the carriage is thereby advanced two units ( 050") as described, t~he blade 286' engages the effective contacts 290', 291' for completing the circuit from source~`
and switch 541', through wires 564' and 618', restorlng solenold 481', wire 619', contact 290!, blade 286', contact 291', wire-620l, switch 614' and to ground through wire 617t, OparatiGn o solenoid 481' recloses the reader control circuit switch 453' for the reading o the succeeding code that is now in the reader.
Word space operations may include additional units ---~
of mo~ement for justifylny pur~oses. A word space is encoded whenever the space bar of the encoding machine is operated.
'~

- a,s~, :
,", ' ~';
.. . . .:

~L~S~3~4 When a word space code 3, 4 is sensed by the main reader 407' (Fig. 31'), the main decoder 494' is operated accordingly and the cocking solenoid 417' in the tape feed mechanism 408' is operated by the reader control circuit.
For each justi~ying word space the wheel 228'(Fig.
53') is always rotated two teeth for moving the carriage two units, wheel 244' may be ro~ ted a number of teeth from one to twenty three for adding the same numker of units as deter-mined by the adjustable stop member 335', and the wheel 249' is never rotated more than one tooth ~one unit portion of a ramainder) for adding one more unit to a number of word spaces that equals the remainder. Thus, it is seen that wheel 228' is always operated a greater extent than wheel 249' and that the wheel 244' may be operated a greater extent than the wheel !
249'. Accordingly, a means is provided for closing the reader control circuit switch 453' as soon as the wheel 228' has rotated its two teeth and the wheel 244' has rotated the number of .
teeth determined by the adjustable stop member 335'. Thus, in . . .
any particular instance where a word space is to have an amount added for justifying purposes, it will be seen that the switch 453' is closed as soon as the wheel 228' or 244' that rotates ~ `
the greater amount is fully operated. However, when the adjust-able stop member 335' is set in normal zero representing position, there being no movement of the wheel 244' in such an instance, the reader control switch 453' is reclosed as soon ''.' ' ' ~ .

. ~5~ `~

" -- , .

~ ~5~3'7~L
as th wheel '28' ~s moved fol cwo units o~ carriage movement.
During reproduct.ion of the justified line, switch 645' (Fiy. 53') is shifted for termina~ing any fuxther possible operations o the counting solenoid ~42' and the motivatir.g soienoid 375', whenever ~he du.plex counter 643' is operated ~o count sixteen word spaces~ The remainder motivatinc3 solenoid 397' is never operated or more than ~ifteen word spaces as controlled by swi~ch 649'. When the switch 645' i5 sh.i~ted and the dçcoder 49a~ i5 operated for a word space, when the switch 634' is closed and the carriase is shifted the normal two unit word space amoùnt, the restoring circuit is effective from source (S) and switch 541', wires 564' and 6i.8', the solenoid 4~1' for reclosing the reader control circuit switch 453' and restoring the word space cycling mechanism, wire 619', contacts 290', 291' and blade 286', wires 620' and 651', a wire 657'.between wire 651' and the switch 645', through . the now shifted switch 6~5', wire 646', switch 634', wire 617'.
and ~o sround. Thus, for all word spaces over sixteen, the ~.ain.
reader control cixcuit is rendered effective for reading an ensuing code and the word space cycling mechanism is restored as descr~bed, as soon as the carri-ge is moved two units.

., . - , ;,.

~1--2~8-. '~ . ' -,,: :

-~L~5337~

9 ' . DUPLEX COUNTER _STRUCTURE

The counting solenoid 642' (Fi~s. 53') is energized at the same time the solenoid 375', solenoid 397', or both are operated to add a justifying amount to a normal word space, and it is deenergized as soon as the movement for the altered word space is complete. In such an instance when the counting solenoid 642' (Fig. 54') is energized, it pulls link 658' and rotates the member 659' clockwise against the stud 685' while the pawl 661' ratchets over one tooth on the segment 662'. When the solenoid 642' is deenergized, the spring 666' returns the drive pawl 66l' and member 659', and the pawl 661' rotates the segment 662' one tooth step counterclockwise while the detent 684' ratchets over one tooth on the segment. In this manner the segment 662' may be operated successive single tooth steps counterclockwise, for countin~ the occurrence o~ as many word spaces. During the first o~ such counterclockwise steps of the segment 662', the stud 664' moves away from the finger 690' and the spring 666' rotates the clearing detent 667' slightly clockwise down on the top edge of the offset 689' so as to be e~fective during a clearing operation. ;~
At times when the segment 662' has counted sixteen i, .
word sgaces and the switch 645' (Fig. 54') has been shifted, the first clockwise return movement of segment 662' withd!aws the insulator 691' from the switch 645' and the switch returns to th illustrated normal condition. By the time the segment `- -- ..

5~ ' ' '.
: :

,331~

6~2' is returned and the stud 664' is stopped in the upper end of slot 665', the stud 664' will hava engaged the finger 690' and thereby rotated the detent 667' counterclockwise to illustrated normal position for releasing the link 678'.
Whereupon, the spring 682' restores the link 678' leftward, the spring 686' restores the detent 684~ counterclocXw~ e, the spring 666' restores the drive pawl 661' into engagement with the segment 662' then in fully restored position, the detent 684' moves away from the pawl 661' and it restores the bail arrangemen-t including stop 670' and bail arm 672' and the detent then enga~es the se~ment 662', the left end of slot 688' moves away from the stud 687' while the finger 677' on link 678' moves into blocking position over stop 570', and the link 678' is stopped in normal position as the right end of slot 681' enga the stud 680', all in that order. Thus, the mechanism is cleared and restored to the illustrated normal zero representing position. The counter also includes a means (primarily me~ber 693' (Figs. 53~- 5~') tha~ is preset~able in a posltion for representing a justifying remainder and that is controlled by the segment 662' for deducting one from the previous setting each-time one unit of the remainder is added to a word space.

.
By thus reducing the previous setting to zero, the means also limits the times one unit of a remainder is added to a word space and the number of times is limited to a number that corresponds to the justifying remainder.

.
.. . ,,~"5_ ' , . '~

' -~3~
... ... ..
Fourteen selectively operable stop solenoids 700' (Fig. 54')~ with respective su~fix numbers 1 14, are arranged in positions corresponding to the first fourteen operated positions of the member 693'. The solenoids 700' are equipped with normally withdrawn stops 701' that are individually designated by respective suffixes, numbers 1 - 14. The solenoids 700' (Fig. 55') are secured on the letward ace of the plate 35', and their normally ineffective stops 701' (Fig. 54'~ extend generally no more than flush with the rightward face of the plake. The arrangement is such that, upon operation o~
solenoid 700', its respsctive stop 701' is extended into blockin~ -alignment with clockwise movement of member 693' for stopping the member in that remainder representing position. Upon deenergization of a solenoid 700', its stop 701' is withdrawn `~
to ineffecti~e position, in a known manner. A stationary stop ~ ;
stud 702' is secured on plate 35' and it extends into effective blocking position for stopping member 693' in the Fiteenth tlar5est number) remain~er _epresenting position.
A pawl 703' is pivotally mounted on the mem~er 693', and it is provided for connecting the member 693' with the segmenk 662' when the member is shifted to a remainder representing `~
position and while the duplex counter counts the number of word spaces that corresponds to the remainder. ~owever, when the mem-ber 693' is in the illustrated zero representing (returned) position, the pawl 703' is held }n its clockwise ineffective . . .
a~l :
. ~
. :

3~
position by the stud 696' as shown, so the segment 662' may -be operated independently of the pawl 703' and member 693'.
A torsion spring 704' is connected to member 693' and to the pawl 703' for urging the pawl counterclockwise into engagement with segment 662' when the member 693' is in a clockwise position. Blade 705' is ~lexed against an insulator 706', and it is arranged to engage a conductor strip 707' and successive contacts 708' - 1 to 708' - lS on the insulator when the mer~ber is moved to remainder representing positions 1 to 15`, respective y.
A contact 708' - 1 to 708' - 15 is effective only when the member 693' is moved to and stopped in ~he correspondlllg remainder representing position; and the continuity through the strip 707', blade 70~' and the effective contact is us~d to cycle the instant remainder code through the main reader.
When the justifying fifteen unit remaind~r code is read, the solenoid 698' is operated for pulling link 697' and rotating the member 693' clockwise against the tension of spring 694' and until the member is stopped in its fifteen uni~
remainder representing position by the stationary stud 702'.
As the member 693' moves the first increment cleck~ise, its insulator 699' permits the switch 649' to close for rendering the motivating solenoid 397' (Fig. 53') operabLe for adding one unit tc each of the first fifteen word spaces. At the same time, the member 693' (Fig. 54') and pawl 703' are moved away . .
from return stud 696', and the spring 704' engages the pawl '' . "' '~ , ' ~

.. . . ., , .. , . . ., . .. , .. .. .. ~ .. . .. ~. . , .. ., . . .. :

.
wi~:h t}le teeth of segment 662' and the pawl ratchets over i~iîteen teeth of the segment. As soon as the blade 705' engages the effective contact 708~ - 15, further cycling occurs and the solenoid 698' is deenergized. Whereupon, the pawl 703' holds the member 693' in its fi~teenth operated position by engagement of the pawl with the segment 662'. This fifteen unit representing position of me~ber 693' will not be called Eox unless the Iine to be reproduced has fi~teen or more word spaces. Thus, during reproduction of the line, when the counting solenoid 642' is operated and the segment 662' is stepped ~ounterclockwise one step for each word ;,pace as described, the me~er 693' is a~so moved counterclockwise step by step `~
therewith by the spring 694' and engagement of the pawl 703' with the segment. Thus, the switch 649' remains closed for fifteen word spaces. However, when the fifteenth word space is counted and the member 693' is shifted the last step counter-cloclcwise, the insulator 6.99' opens the SWitC}-l 649' for preventing further operations of solenoid 397' (Fig. 53'!, and the pawl 703' (Fig. 54') engages the stud 696' and it is rotated clear of the segment 662' as shown. Thereafter, when the line is terminated and the clearing solenoid 679' is operated, the segmen~ 662' is restored clockwise without interference from the pawl 703' and the me~ber 693' then in restored con~ition agains1: stud 696'. `
When a code for any other justifying remainder (1 - 14) ' .~
3 ~ : :
.

..~ .
.. ~ . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .

~533 ~f~
is read, the solenoid 698' is operated together with the one of the solenoids 700' - 1 to 700' ~ 14 that corresponds to the remainder. Under such a condition, the soneoid 698' rotates the member 693' cloc~ise against the then ef~ectively extended stop 701' - 1 to 701' - 14 or setting the member 693' in the corresponding remainder representing position.
When the blade 705' engages the effective contact 708' - 1 to 708' - 14, further cycling of the machine is accomplished and the solenoid 69~3' is deenergized, and the pawl 703' connects the member 693' with the segment 662' in the same manner as descrlb~d previously. Thus; under any condition where there is a justifying remainder, the duplex counter is conditioned to permit the switch 649' to remain closed until the solenoid 397' (~ig. 53') has added one unit to a number o word spaces that corresponds to the value of the justifying ~emaindar.
.'' ' ~ , 10'. J~STI~ICATION CODES

~ ustification of the lines in the in~tant reproducer lS controlled by one or two sets of code punch holes (justifica~
tion codes) that are located ahead of the code punch holes for characters and functions that make up the text codes for each line to be justified. The first possible set of justifica~ion codes is the quotient code, whLch is for controlling th~ - -adjustment of the stop member 335' (Fig. 301) in the carriage moving mechanism. The second possible set of justification .

' ~ ' ' ' .
~`1, ' ' ' ' ' ~, , 33~ :

codes is the remainder code, which is or controlling the ad-justment of the member 693' (Fig. 54') in the duplex counter.
Thus, operation of the decoder according to a quotient code, to set stop member 335' (Fig. 30') completes a circuit that runs from the source and switch 541' (Fig. 57'), thrcugh wire 709', solenoid 339' for rotating the adjustable stop member 335~ counterclockwise, wire ?10 ~, switch 712', wire 715', one of the differential stop solenoids 341' and its wire 716' or the wire 717' as the case may be, the respective contact 373' - 1 to 373' - 23, and it goes-to ground through the respective wire 718' - 1 to 718' - 23 and the operated decoder.
Thus, the adjustable stop member 335' (Fig. 30') is moved to a quotient representing position by operation of the solenoid 339 and the position is determined by the effective stop 342' - 1 to 342' - 22 or 343' according to a quotient code.
As soon as the member 335' is moved into the quotient representing position, the blade 371' is engaged with the e~fecti~v~e contact 373' - 1 to 373' - 23 ~or operating the solenoid 357' and for engaging the locking pawl 344'.
When switch 369' (Fig. 31') opens, the reader control circuit is broken for deenergizing the cocking solenoid 417', the read solenoid 422' and the decoder motivating solenoids that were energized in response to the reading of the quotient code. Deenergization of the solenoid 417' permits the cocked tape feed mechanism 408' to feed the just read quotient code !

S , ,' ~ .

' _ _ . .. _ . , . ... ~ . , . _ . . . . . _ . . . ... _ . . . . . _ . , , .. ., _ _ , , '' . . : ' . ' , ~ ' ' , . , ' ' out of the reader 407', and, if there is a justification remainder code into the reader. At times when there is no remainder code for the lir.e, blank tape will be fed into the reader at this time.
As soon as the quotient code is fed out of the main xeader and the switch 419' (Fig. $7') is closed as described, current flows from source (S) through switch 419', wire 720',, the nQw closed switch 361', wire 7~1', the solenoid 367', wire 722', and goes to ground through solenoid 431'. Operation of the solenoid 367' (Fig. 30') recloses the reader control circuit switch 369', and, when the pawl 363' releases stud 362', the spring 354' rotates the member 353' back against the stud 347' and permits the switch 361' to open. Operation of the solenoid 431' (Fig. 57') conditions the feed-read switch means 421' for consecutive feeding operations. The opening of switch 361' deenergizes the solenoids 367' and 431', and thus the cycles of operations for.setting the adjustable stop member 335', according to a quotient code, is complete. By alternate operation of the cocking solenoid 417' and the snap-switch ope~ing of switch 418', the blank spaces of the control tape 41~' are fed forwardly through the main reader 407' (Fig. 31') until the .
next code is read. When the next code is read (in this instance, the first text code for the line), the cocking solenoid 417' is energized simultaneously by the reader control circuit that ~ ;
is shown here and that goes through the wire 530', the "read"
. - . ~ .
.
,~

.. - ~ .

.

~533 ~ :
solenoid 422' and by the consecutive step tape feed circuit controlled hy switches 418' and 426' (FigO 57'). Since the "read" solenoid 422' is now energized simultaneously with the cocking solenoid 417', the reader control circuit takes pre- -cedence, and the solenoid 422' opens the switch 426' for .
terminating the consecutive step blank tape feeding operations.
Reading of the remainder code will immediately cause the "read" solenoid 422' to open the switch 426' tFig. 57') for rendering the consecutive step tape feed circuit ineffective, while the reader control cixcuit remains effective for operating the cocking solenoid 417', the solenoid 422' (Fig. 31') and the motivating solenoids that correspond to the code (in this case, the remainder code) in the decoder 494'. When the decoder is operated according to a remainder code, the corresponding circuit runs from source and the switch 541' (Fig. 57'), through wires 709' and 726', the solenoid 698' for shifting :
the member 693' to operated position, wire 727', blades 728' and .
730', wire 731', directly to contact 708' - 15 in the case of a ifteen unit remainder or through the appropriate one of the solenoids 700' - 1 to 700' - 14 and a respective wire 732', the effective contact 708' - 1 to 708' - 15, the wire 733' ~
to 733' - 15 and the circuit goes to ground through the operated decod~r (Fig. 50'). When the member 693' (Fig. 54') is stopped in the remainder representing position by the effective stop 701' - l to 701' - 14 or by the fifteenth stop 702', the , .~ .
- ~ 1 , ' ~" "
' -','. ~
. ;~
.. . , . . ~.

~ 5~3~ ~

member ~93' is coupled with the segment 662' by pawl 703' and the blade 705' is engaged with ~he ef~ective contact 708'-1 to 708' - 15, for continuing the tape cycling operations.

a. Justify - No Justif~ Key The justification control key, Justify - No Justify key 713' (Figs. 8' and 57'), is presettable, at the will of the operator, for controlling the reproducer to produce justified copy lines as described above, or to produce unjustified copies even though the control tape that is being used contains the :.
justification codes. The key 713' (Fig. 34') is pivoted on a bolt 751' that is secured on the ~rame plate 20' (Fig. 9'). .
A member 752' ~Fig. 34') is also pivoted on bolt 751', along ~:
slde of the key 713'. .

. . ' `' ' ' ''. ~,;"`' .
CASE SHIFT, B~Y CODE . :

~ The upper case function code is 4, 6, and the lower ~:
: .:
case function code is 4, 7, as can be seen by referring to : :
- C~RT D among the charts that follow the.figure descriptions. .. :
: ;; , ~, , The arrangement for automatically shifting the ~ .

mac,ine to upper case condition is shown in FigO 58'. A wire .-~
, 759' (~ig. 58') is connected to the norm~lly .closed swi~ch 541' :~

.and to an upper case shift motivating solenoid 760'. A wire ; ~.

. 751' is connected between soIenoid 760' and the upper case ...

,~ .

.. . .
. . .
, :

53;3 7~
terminal that is marked "UP. CASE (4,6)", in Fig. 50' of the main ~ecod~r 494 (Fig. 58l)~
When the main reader 407' (Fig. 31') senses the upper case code 4, 6 and the decod~r 494' (Fig. 58~) is operated accordingly, current travels from source ~S), through switch 541', wire 759', solenoid 760', wire 761', and it goes to ~round through the operated decoder 494'. Operation of solenpid 760' shifts the machine in upper case condit~on.
rrhe arrangement for automatically shifting the machine to lower case condition will now be descri~ed. A wire 769' (FigO 58') is connecked between the wire 759' and a solenoid ~ -770'0 A wire 7~1' is connected to a solenoid 770' and to the lower case terminal that is marked l'LOWER CASE (4,7)" in the Fig. 50' of the decoder.
When the main reader 407' (Fig. 31') senses the lower case code 4, 7 and the decoder 494' is operated accordingly, current travels from source and switch 541' (Fig. 58'), through the wires 759' and 769', ~olenoid 770', wire 771' and it goes to ground through the operated decoder 494'. Operation of solenoid 770' returns the machine to lower case condition.

~ ' , . .
. ~l S ' ,'. ., ' . ' - ~ ' , ., , - ~, . - .. . :-- ::

~5;~3~L
- 12'. DELETE AND BACI~ SPACE
FUNCTION CODES

The delete and back space function codes cause no function in the-reproducer, other than to employ a delete and back space function cycling mechanism for controlling the control tape to be fed through the reader to bypass these codes.
When the reader 407' (~ig. 31') senses a delete or a back space function code and the decoder 494' is operated accordingly the decoder provides a ground for the circuit that travels ~rom source and switch 541' ~Fig. 58'), through wire ;
564', solenoid 853', wire 8S5' and goes to ground through the operated decoder. Operation of solenoid 853' causes the reader control circuit switch 453' to be opened, whereupon the tape feed mechanism 408' (Fig~ 31') shifts the code out of the reader 407' and the decoder 494' is normalized. When the . . ..
decoder 494' ~Fig. 58') is normalized and the solenoid ~S3' i~ thereby deenergized, the cycling mechanism closes the switch 854', and current flows from source and switch 541', through wires 564' and 618', solenoid 481', wires 619' and 856', and it goes to ground through now closed switch 854'. The solenoid 481' reclosss the reader control circuit switch 453' for reading ,~ .
of the succeeding code, and ~t restores the operated cy~ling mechanism for opening the switch 854' to deenergize the solenoid 481'. In this way, one or more delete codes and the accompanying back space function codes are fed idly through the -"
.~
- . ' ~7~ ' . '~,:
. . '' -533~ ~
read`er 407' (Fig. 31'), andthe reprodu~er does not perform the deleted operations~

13 ' . EXTRA LINE SPACING, BY CODES

An extra line spacing operation is performed in the reproducer whenever an extra line spacing code is sensed, as showr~ in Figs. 64'-67'.

14 ' . BOLD FACE AND REGUI~R AND .
PRI~IT AND NO ?RT~T CONTROLS

The bold and regular co3iltrol 545' may be shifted by a key 966' (Fig. 8') in regular condition ("Reg.") or"bold"
condition for, respectively thereafter, controlllng the machine to imprint characters with normal ~orce or to print in a strong "bold" manner. The control may be shifked, from one c~ndition to the other, ~y manipulation of the key 966', or it may be shifted automatically by Imoti-vating solenoids 967' and 968' ~Fig. 69l) to regular and bold conditions, respectively, as ~
,;,.
controlled by corresponding codes on the code medium. The control may be locked in either condition by manipulation of a lock 969', and, when the lock 969' is in effective position, ~ -the control cannot be shifted by inadvertent manipulation o E key 966' or by automatic operation of a motivating solenoid 967' or 968', and in the latter instance the code for such a shift will -merely be cycled through the reader. Bold and regular printing , .

may ~e controlled entirely by the control tape, or either desired contrary condition of bold and regular printing may be accomplished from the same tape. ~
The print-no p-in~ control 553' (Fig. 51') may be . ~.
shifted by a key 970~ (Fig. 8~j in print condition or no print çondition ~or, xespectively thereafter, controlling the machine to imprint and shift the carriage appropriately for each chara~ter, or not to print and to merely shift the carriage appropriately for each character and, in the latter instance, .

blank space is provided for variables, even though charactexs ~i :: - . ' .and spaces are encoded ~n the control tape~ The control 553' .~ . :
(Fig. 51') may be shi~ted, from one condition to the other, by ma.nipulation of the key 970' ~Fig. 8'), or it may be shi~ted :~
automatically by motivating sol~Dids 971' and 972' (Fig. 51') .
to print and no print conditions, respectively, in rasponse to corresponding codes on the code medium. Control 553' may .~
be locked in either condïtion by manipulation of a lock 9.73' ~.
(Fig. 8'), ar.d, when the 7 0cX is in effective position at a time when the control might otherwise be shifted automatically, the code for such a shift is merely shifted throush the reader.
It wlll be seen that print and no print conditions may be con- .
trolled automatically by correspondïng codes on the control ~:

tape, or either desired contrar~r condition may be.enforced by . .
.- . .~' :
the lock 973'.

.. . .... . .

~a. - . .
' .;': . :

.~ .

. .. . ...... . ... ... . . ... . .. . . . . ... . . . .. . . .. . ..... . . . .. ...... .
- :. : . , . ~. . : ,. , ~S;~3~ds 15 ' . CARRIAGE RETURN

The carriage re urn code ~1, 2, 3, 7) (1) releases the positive drive clutch 155' (Fig. 24') for return of the paper carriage, (2) returns the adjustable stop member 335' (Fig. 30') to the normal zero quotient representing position shown, (3) restores the duplex counter segment 662' (Fig. 54') to the normal zero representing position shown, and (4) line spaces the platen 115' (Pig. 8') and the reproduced copy paper thereon a number of line ~paces that is predetermined by the position of a line space control button 1055'. ~ `

16'. ~ORM~L LI~E SPACING MECHANISM
.: . . .
The normal line space motivating solenoid 1064' ~Fig. 75') is energized when the carrlage is fully returned, and at such times it is energized until the solenoid 166' has reengagéd the drive clutch and the switch 182' is opened.

17 ' o _ LINE DELETER

.
Reading of a line delete code prepares the reproducer to feed the control tape, to read and bypass the text and -~
function codes that follow, but otherwise to avoid the ccrres- ;
ponding text and function operation.s for the deleted line. !,: ' Finally, when the carriage xeturn code fsr the deleted line is ;~
.

~ 3 -.~

`: . ' 37P~ :
xead, the reproducer does not perform the normal carriage return operations, but thereupon it does return to normal operating condition.
When the reader 407~ (FigO 31~) senses a line delete code 3, _, 5, 7, the main reader control circuit causes the solenoid 417' to cock the tape feed mechanism 408', it causes -the solenoid 422' to shi~t the ~ced-read switch means 421' to "read" condition, and it causes the main reader 494' ~o be ~
operated according to the sensed code. Operation of the decoder ~ --494' according to the line delete code initiates line delete operations.
When the line delete code is sensed and the decoder : :
494' (Fig. 76') is operated accordingly as describedr current 10ws ~rom source and normally closed switch 541', through .:
wire 1104', the solenoid 1105', the wire 1107' and it goes to ground through the operated decoder. Operation of solenoid .
1105' tFig. 43') pulls link 1108' and rotates member llO9' - , , . - .
agains rod 465lo Just prior to full operation of me~ber ~lO9', ?,.., ',, .
..
the end of pawl 1111' latches into a notch (like notch 612', ` ` .
(Fiy. 39') in the upper end of member llO9' tFig. 43'), under tension of spring 1114'. As the pawl llll' latches downward, ;i~ ~ -it pushes the stud 1117' downward and thus shifts the insulator 1119' away from switch 541' tc permit the switch to open.

As previously described, all major normal operations, that may be initiated by operation o~ the main decoder, . ~ .

.,.~_ ' ' ;, .' '' , . O . . ...... . ..... . . . .. . ... ... . .. . . .. .... .. . ... ... . . . .. . .

~ 33~7~
rec~ive their SOUXC3 of power through the switch 541'.
~herefore,-no normal decoder controlled operations will be . -performed, while the switch 541' is open and while the codes for the deleted iine are fed through the reader.
As soon as t7ne switch 541' is opened, the circuit through the solenoid 1105' (Fig. 76') is also broken.
Deenergization of solenoid 1105' (Fig. 43') permits the spring 1110' to return member 1109' clockwise against rod 464'.
Return of member llQ9' pushes the latched pawl 1111' and rotates member 1113' clockwise to open switch 455' and to close thè switch 1116'. At the same time/ the finger 1124' of member 1113' releases the restoring pawl 1121' to the influence of its spring 1123' which rotates the pawl 1121' against the stud 1117'. The mechanism 1106' remains in this condition while the encoded text for the deleted line is fed through the reader.
When the switch 455' (Fig. 31') is opened, the main reader control circuit is broken. Whereupon, the mechanism -408' feeds the line delete code out of the reader, tne decoder 494' is returned to normal and the solenoid 422' is deenergized i -; `
.
while the latch means 428' holds switch means 421' in "read"
condltion~
Closure of switch 1116' (Fig. 43') completes circuits for causing consecutive tape feeding~ fo~ reading the ccdes on the control tape to determine the occurrence of the carriage return code at the end of the deleted line, and for restoring ..~
~ ' . .', ' ~S ~

' ' ~ . ' `,.

3'y~

the machine from line delete condition to normal condition upon operation of the decoder according to the carriage return code.

18'. AUTOM~TIC CONDITIONING

In the composer portion of this application it i5 .
explained that the composer may be in any one of eight combined conditions, when conditioning encoding may occur, and accord-ingly any Qne o~ eight corresponding codes may be recorded .
on the control tape. I~heI1 a conditioning code is sensed by the main reader, the reproducer will operate to assume the corresponding condition, which is the condition that the composer was in at the time the condition was encoded. The eight possible conditions o~ the exemplary machines are ~ -listed in the "CHART E", hereinabove. :
'. ~ .... ~.. ~ ..
When the reader 407' (Fig. 31') senses one of the eight conditioning codes, the decoder 494' is operated accordingIy. Such an operation of the decoder completes a circuit for initiating one of the conditioning sequences of operations. To this end, a wire 114~' (Fig. 77') is connected -to the normally closed switch 541' and to each of the solenoids 1135' - 1 through L135' - 80 The initial number 1135' corresponds to the solenoid 1135' (Fig. 42'), while the suffix numbers 1-8 (Fig. 77') correspond to the conditions (1) - (8) .
(CH~RT E) with which the solenoids are assoc1ated. ~

~ , ~, '~ '.
, ' ' . "'' :.

. .. ... . .,.. ,,, .... . . .... .. . . . .. ., .. , ., . .. ,. :

From the above, it can be sean that opexation of the decoder, according to a conditioning code, completes a circuit that flows from source and switch 541' (Fig. 77'), through wire 1146 ', the appropriate one o~ the solenoids 1135' - 1 to 1135' - 8 and the respective wire 1147' - 1154', and it goes to ground through the operated decodex 494'.

~ ' 19 ' . AIJTOMATIC CLEARING

Cleaxing consists of putting ~he machine in the normal lower case, regular and print conditions, in one cycle o~ operations, and it occurs automatically upon ~
reading of a clear code. ( 3, 4, 6,7 Chart D)~ `

.' '. ' ' .

. ' - ~

~.'1'1 ' ' ' ' ......... . .

3~
43._ JUSTIFYING AREA SIG~L

A signal arrangement is provided for indicating to the operator that a line has progressed into the normal end of line signal area, or, as in the instant machine and other justifying composing, machines, the area near the ned of the line that may be called the justifying areaO The preferred signal indicates entry into the justifying area, and thereafter indicates the number of units that are left in the line. Whan such an arrange- ;
ment is provided, an operator may t~pe along freely, without concern for the extent of progress, and only upon re~ognition of the signal will he consider terminating the line, returning the carriage and thus causing justification encoding, etc., when the just;~fying mechanism is effective, as previously described.
To provide this signalling feature, the following structure is included with that which has a~ready be~n described.
' Visual and audible signals will be gi~en, ~hen the main switch 3325 (Fig. 3) is turned o~ and when a line has been extendedjto less than .600'1 from the right margin, When these ~ -two conditions exist, and the gear 1577 (Fig. 187) and lever '~ , 1580 are positioned to represent the extent of the line, the member 3329 (Fig. 186) and the switch blade 3330 are likewise positioned where the furcation 3332 is on one of the contacts as described. When the furcation 3332 is on, or passes over, ':
. :--27~- -.~ ' ''' ~' .

"

~5337~ ~ :

one of the interconnected contacts 3335 (Fig. 188) in the .575"
- .475'l representing positions, the signal circuit is complete through wire 3336, ring 3333, blade 3330, the engaged one of the interconnected contacts, wire 3337, bulb 3338 that visually indicates that there are from 19 - 23 units left in the line, through wire 3341, the audible signalling device 3342 for sounding the alarm, wire 3343, and the return llne wire 3327.
From the above, it can be seen that the light bulb 3338 will flash and the audible signalling device 3342 will sound each time the blade 3330 passes over the contacts in positions 0575"
- .475", and when the machine is stopped in one of these positi~ns~
the bulb 3338 will remain lit and the device 3342 will sound and preferably the device will then remain silent. When the ~achine is in or passes any of the positions from .450~i _ O
~rom the end of the line, the.signalling circuit is similarly effective and the current will pass through blade 3330, the distinct position indicating contact 3335, its wire 3339, and the corresponding light bulb 3340 for indicating the precise position of the carriage in respect to the right hand margin and indlcating the number of units left in the line at that `;
instant as described. From the above, it can be seen that an alarm is sounded and the progress of a line in the later part .-thereof;is clearly indicatedO
The bulbs 3338 and 3340 may also be color-coded to significantly delineate among the lights and the respective -279- t number of units left in the line. For example, the bulb 3338 that represent~ the grouped numbers of units 19-23 may be colored blue, and the individual bulbs 334 that represent the units 18 - 5 may be green. The bulb that indicates there are four units remaining in the line may be colored yellow to signify that any character or space will still fit in the line but to further signify that this is ~he last position in which a 4 unit character will fit. This yellow light would also alext the operator to the facts that a four unit character will completely fill the line, that operation of a 3 or 4 unit key will cause locking of all composing keys, that the three and four unit space keys should not be op~rated if ~ustifying encoding is effective, that a two unit space key should not be operated unless it will be followed by a two unit character if justlfying will be performed~ and that operation of a two unit character or space will cause locking of all composing keys except those that are two units. It should be remembered that deleting of an improperly used space, in the disclosed emhodiment, will eliminate -the space and permit proper termination of a line, as described. -The bulb that indicates three units in the line may be colored ;;
orange, for example, to signify that the four unit keys are locked, that three and two unit characters will still fit and they are still operable, and that no space keys should be operated.~ -~he bulb that indicates two units in the line may be colored red to signify that all but the two unit keys are locked and that spaces should not be added. The one unit and the zero units .i .

~6~5~ 7~
~0, full line~ bulbs 3340 may be white to signify that all composing keys are locked against operation, and that the line is nearly perfectly filled out or it is exactly filled, respect-ively, as the case may be.

Claims (11)

THE EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION IN WHICH AN EXCLUSIVE
PROPERTY OR PRIVILEGE IS CLAIMED ARE DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:

1. A justifying composing machine comprising dividing and encoding means including first and second control means having respective first and second control input means, first and second output means connected to said dividing and encoding means, amount left in a line measuring means, commutator means responsive to said amount left in a line measuring means and connected to said first input means of the first control means for energizing said dividing and encoding means in accordance with the amount left in a line representing a dividend, word space counting means, means for connecting said word space counting means to said second input means of the second control means for further energizing said dividing and encoding means in accordance with the counted word spaces representing a divisor whereby encoded output signals are produced at said first output means which represent a quotient value and whereby further encoded output signals are produced at said second output means which represent a remainder.

2. A dividing and encoding apparatus comprising first dividing and encoding means, second dividing and encoding means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding means, dividend input means connected to said first dividing and encoding means, divisor input means connected to said second dividing and encoding means, said dividend and divisor input means comprising means for substantially simultaneously energizing the respective dividing and encoding means in response to dividend and divisor input signals, first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded re-mainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means.

3. A justifying reproducing apparatus to be operated responsive to information encoded in a coded medium by a justifying composing machine including a dividing and encoding apparatus comprising first dividing and encoding means, second dividing and encoding means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding means, dividend input means con-nected to said first dividing and encoding means, divisor input means connected to said second dividing and encoding means, said dividend and divisor input means comprising means for substantially simultaneously energizing the respective dividing and encoding means in response to dividend and divisor input signals, first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded remainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means, said justifying reproducing apparatus comprising a carriage and being capable of producing printed lines having words and normal word spaces between ad-jacent words and adjusting the normal word spaces by an amount formed by a quotient amount and a remainder amount wherein said quotient amount and remainder amount represent the number of units left in a line divided by the number of word spaces in that line, said justifying reproducing apparatus comprising:
reader means for sensing said information, decoder means connected to said reader means for decoding said information and producing control signals, justifier means connected to said decoder means respon-sive to said control signals capable of automatically adjusting the spacing between words on each of said printed line, carriage moving means connected to said justifier means for moving said carriage said normal word space plus an ad-justable justifying spacing amount, and printer means connected to said decoder means for printing characters to form said printed lines.

4. The combination according to claim 3, wherein said justifier means comprises:
quotient means connected to said decoder means to form a quotient amount and produce a quotient number of units space to be added to each said word space on a line, remainder means connected to said decoder means to form a remainder amount and produce a remainder unit space to be added to the number of word spaces equal to the remainder amount, and accumulator means for adding said quotient number of units space and said remainder unit space to said normal word spaces to form justified word spaces.

5. The combination according to claim 4, comprising means to decrease said remainder amount for each remainder unit space added to each of said word spaces to limit the number of remainder units added to said word spaces on a line.

6. A dividing and encoding apparatus, comprising:
first dividing and encoding switching means comprising a number of first electrically conducting slide means, means for electrically contacting said first slide means and insulatedly supporting said first slide means for movement back and forth between a normal position and an excursion position, dividend input means comprising amount left-in-a-line measuring means, and first solenoid means responsive to said amount in a line measuring means, first means for coupling said first slide means to said first solenoid means for moving the first slide means to an excursion position, second dividing and encoding switching means comprising second slide means arranged in a second number of group assem-blies, each of said group assemblies comprising a third number of electrically conducting dividing and encoding slide plates, means for insulatedly and movably supporting said dividing and encoding slide plates, whereby each slide plate is insulated from any other slide plate and whereby each group of slide plates is movable back and forth between a normal position and an ex-cursion position, divisor input means comprising word space counter means, second solenoid means and third solenoid means responsive to said word space counter means, second means for coupling the second solenoid means to respective ones of said group assem-blies for selecting any one of said groups in response to the word space counter means, and third means for coupling said third solenoids to the group assemblies for moving a selected group of slide plates from its normal position to an excursion position also in response to the word counter means, a source of current connected to said first slide means, and output circuit means comprising a plurality of stationary contact bars and means for insulatedly supporting said contact bars which are arranged to be contacted in a code channel relationship by said slide plates in their excursion positions whereby coded output signals are produced at said output circuit means which signals represent said quotient and remainder.

7. A dividing and encoding apparatus for encoding justifying information in a justifying composing machine, comprising:
first dividing and encoding switching means, second dividing and encoding switching means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding switching means, dividend and divisor input means comprising means for energizing and respective switching means in response to dividend and divisor input signals respectively, first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding switching means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded remainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means, amount left-in-a-line measuring means and a word space counter con-nected to said input means, a recording device including a record medium, means for advancing the record medium through the recording device in a given direction, a plurality of re-cording means in said recording device and arranged in a code channel relationship, means for connecting said recording means to said output circuit means and to energize said recording means for recording said coded output signals on said record medium in said code channel relationship in response to the output signals of said dividing and encoding apparatus, and means responsive to said word space counter and amount-left in-a-line measuring means for preventing the recording of a word space code on said recording medium as the last encoded text information for any line of text.

8. A dividing and encoding apparatus for encoding justifying information in a justifying composing machine, comprising:
first dividing and encoding switching means, second dividing and encoding switching means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding switching means, dividend and divisor input means comprising means for energizing the respective switching means in response to dividend and divisor input signals respectively, first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding switching means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded remainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means, amount left-in-a-line measuring means and a word space counter con-nected to said input means, said amount-left-in-a-line measuring means comprising commutator means connected to said dividend input means, and said word space counter comprising further com-mutator means connected to said divisor input means, a re-cording device including a tape, means for advancing the tape through the recording device in a given direction, a plurality of recording means in said recording device and arranged in a code channel relationship means for connecting said recording means to said output circuit means and to energize said re-cording means for recording said coded output signals on said tape in said code channel relationship in response to the output signals of said dividing and encoding apparatus, means responsive to said word space counter and amount-left-in-a-line measuring means for preventing the recording of a word space code and said tape as the last encoded text information for any line of text, said means for advancing said tape comprising sprocket wheels, means for driving said sprocket wheels in a stepping fashion through said recording device, said plurality of recording means comprising text and function information recording means and justifying information recording means, said text and function information recording means being arranged upstream of said justifying information recording means, the latter being arranged upstream of said main reader means all as viewed in the direction of advance of said tape, said text and function information recording means being spaced from said justifying information recording means to provide a first gap therebetween, said justifying information recording means being spaced from said main reader means to provide a second gap therebetween, means for accumulating respective tape loops in said first and second gaps, means for selectively eliminating said tape loops, switching means responsive to said eliminating of said tape loops for controlling the cooperation of said apparatus, and a backspace reader lo-cated between said text and function information recording means and said justifying information recording means adjacent to said first gap.

9. A dividing and encoding apparatus for encoding justifying information in a justifying composing machine, comprising:
first dividing and encoding switching means, second dividing and encoding switching means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding switching means, dividend and divisor input means comprising means for energizing the respective switching means in response to dividend and divisor input signals respectively, first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding switching means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded remainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means, amount left-in-a-line measuring means and a word space counter connected to said input means, a recording device including a record medium, means for advancing the record medium through the recording device in a given direction, a plurality of recording means in said recording device and arra nged in a code channel relation-ship means for connecting said recording means to said output circuit means and to energize said record ing means for recording said coded output signals on said record medium in said code channel relationship in response to the output signals of said dividing and encoding apparatus, means responsive to said word space counter and amount-left-in-a-line measuring means for preventing the recording of a word space code on said recording medium as the last encoded text information for any line of text, a carriage and main reader means, said plurality of recording means comprising text and carriage re-turn code encoding means for encoding text information and for encoding a carriage return code at the end of a line of encoded text information, normally open switch means connected to said record medium advancing means and responsive to the conclusion of a recording by said recording means for advancing a length of record medium through said recording means, said length of record medium being sufficient for the entering of said car-riage return code into said main reader means, said main reader means comprising output means, sensing means for sensing said code medium and connected to said output means, means for step feeding the record medium through said main reader past said sensing means, said step feeding means comprising feed circuit means and read circuit means, a record medium loop normally lo-cated upstream of said sensing means, loop responsive switching means operatively connected to said feed circuit means and to said read circuit means for controlling said circuit means and thus the operation of said main reader means.

10. A dividing and encoding apparatus for encoding justifying information in a proportional spacing justifying composing machine, comprising:

first dividing and encoding switching means;
second dividing and encoding switching means arranged for cooperation with said first dividing and encoding switching means;
dividend and divisor input means comprising means for energizing the respective switching means in response to dividend and divisor input signals respectively;
first and second output circuit means connected respectively to said first and second dividing and encoding switching means for producing an encoded quotient representative signal and an encoded remainder representative signal at said first and second output circuit means;
amount left-in-a-line measuring means and a word space counter connected to said input means;
a recording device including a record medium;
means for advancing the record medium through the re-cording device in a given direction;
a plurality of recording means in said recording device and arranged in a code channel relationship means for connecting said recording means to said output circuit means and to energize said recording means for recording said coded output signals on said record medium in said code channel relationship in response to the output signals of said dividing and encoding apparatus;
means responsive to said word space counter and amount-left-in-a-line measuring means for preventing the recording of a word space code on said recording medium as the last encoded text information for any line of text; backspace reader means;
means for moving said record medium through the backspace reader means in a direction opposite said given direction, means for causing incremental movement of a print point of said composing machine in response to the output of said backspace reader means; and means responsive to the output of said backspace reader means for subtracting each word space encoded on said record medium and sensed by said backspace reader means from the count of said word space counter and adding said word space to said amount-left-in-a-line measuring means.

11. In a typographic apparatus, a justifying dividing and encoding means comprising an amount left in a line measuring means operable in the latter portion of composition of a line for determining the amount left in a line prior to termination of the line, a space counter for counting the number of adjustable spaces in a line prior to termination of the line, and a line terminating means for operating said justifying dividing and encoding means to, in one instant, encode the justifying quotient and remainder under control of said measuring means and said space counter as adjusted by composition of the line.